Medium Voltage

Application Guide
 CONTENTS

Contents

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2 Motors ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Common types of industrial motors .................................................................................................................................................. 5
Induction motors........................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Useful formulae .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Slip-ring motors ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Synchronous motors ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Motor starting methods ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Direct on-line starting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Primary resistance starting..................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Auto-transformer starting ..................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Star-Delta starting ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Soft starters ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Variable frequency drives (VFD) ....................................................................................................................................................... 17

3 Soft Starters ........................................................................................................................................................................ 19

3.1 What is a Soft Starter .............................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Open loop soft start control ............................................................................................................................................................... 20
Closed loop soft start control............................................................................................................................................................. 21
3.2 Benefits ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
Electrical Benefits ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Mechanical Benefits................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Application Benefits .................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
3.3 Anatomy ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Key components ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 23
SCRs.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23
Snubber circuits .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Heatsinks ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24
Fans.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Busbars ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
Current sensors .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Housing ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Common functionality and features ................................................................................................................................................ 26
3.4 AuCom Medium Voltage Soft Starters .......................................................................................................................................... 29
MVS Soft Starter ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
MVX Soft Starter ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
Soft starter communication options ................................................................................................................................................ 40
Predictive Maintenance Module (PMM) ........................................................................................................................................ 42
3.5 Selection Guidelines ................................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Considerations ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 43
Switchgear Requirements ...................................................................................................................................................................... 45
AC53 Utilisation Codes ......................................................................................................................................................................... 52
3.6 Calculations ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
What is the minimum start current with a soft starter? ....................................................................................................... 54
Calculating required start current for new or existing AC induction motor installations .................................. 54
3.7 Special Applications .................................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Forward/Reverse motor starting ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
Multi-motor starting ................................................................................................................................................................................. 61
AuCom multi-motor starting solution ............................................................................................................................................ 64
Slip ring motor control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 66
3.8 Common standards for MV soft starters and switchgear panels ..................................................................................... 68

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 1

CONTENTS

4 Switchgear............................................................................................................................................................................ 69
4.1 Switchgear Classifications ...................................................................................................................................................................... 70
IEC Switchgear Classification ............................................................................................................................................................... 71
ANSI-defined switchgear ....................................................................................................................................................................... 72
Switchgear Ratings..................................................................................................................................................................................... 72
Switchgear information for enquiries or ordering .................................................................................................................... 72
Switchgear derating .................................................................................................................................................................................. 73
4.2 Standard Enclosure Configurations .................................................................................................................................................. 74
Incomer Feeder Panel (IFP) .................................................................................................................................................................. 74
Direct Incomer Panel (DIP) ................................................................................................................................................................. 75
Bus Coupler Panel (BCP) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 76
Bus Riser Panel (BRP) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 77
Metering Panel (MTP) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 78
Busbar Systems ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 79
4.3 Safety Considerations .............................................................................................................................................................................. 83
Switchgear interlocking systems ......................................................................................................................................................... 83
Internal arc classification ......................................................................................................................................................................... 85
4.4 Switchgear Apparatus .............................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers ..................................................................................................................................................... 88
Medium Voltage Contactors ............................................................................................................................................................... 96
Medium Voltage Switches .................................................................................................................................................................. 100
Medium Voltage HRC Fuses ............................................................................................................................................................ 104
Current Transformers .......................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Current Sensors ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Protection Devices ................................................................................................................................................................................. 121
Voltage Transformers ........................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Motor Line Inductors on Soft Starter Applications .............................................................................................................. 130
Medium Voltage Surge Arrestors .................................................................................................................................................. 132
Power Factor Capacitors .................................................................................................................................................................... 136
4.5 Calculations ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 143
Transformer Calculations ................................................................................................................................................................... 143
Motor Calculations................................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Busbar Calculations ................................................................................................................................................................................ 149
Short Circuit Calculations ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Impedance Method Calculations .................................................................................................................................................... 159
4.6 Switchgear Inspection Checklists .................................................................................................................................................... 162
Mechanical Inspection .......................................................................................................................................................................... 162
Electrical Inspection ............................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Commissioning Tools and Equipment (Typical) .................................................................................................................... 164
4.7 Switchgear-Related IEC Standards ................................................................................................................................................ 165
4.8 Comparison of IEC and IEEE Standards ..................................................................................................................................... 167
Examples of differences in rating requirements ..................................................................................................................... 167
4.9 IEC Switchgear Rating Definitions.................................................................................................................................................. 168
Voltage.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 168
Current ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 168
Frequency, fr (Hz) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 169
4.10 Protection index ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
IP Ratings ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
NEMA Ratings .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 171

5 Schematic Diagrams ..................................................................................................................................................... 172

5.1 Electrical Symbols - Common Switching Functions ............................................................................................................. 172
5.2 Circuit Breaker Control (Typical) .................................................................................................................................................. 173
5.3 Contactor Control (Typical) ............................................................................................................................................................. 174
5.4 Automatic Changeover Systems .................................................................................................................................................... 175
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 175
5.5 MVS Schematic Diagrams .................................................................................................................................................................. 178

Page 2 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 CONTENTS

E3 panel option........................................................................................................................................................................................ 178

E2 panel option........................................................................................................................................................................................ 179
5.6 MVX Schematic Diagrams ................................................................................................................................................................. 180
Contactor panel option ....................................................................................................................................................................... 180
Circuit breaker panel option ............................................................................................................................................................ 181

6 Resources .......................................................................................................................................................................... 182

6.1 Equipment Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................... 182
6.2 Metric/Imperial Conversion Factors.............................................................................................................................................. 216
6.3 Wire Diameter Conversion .............................................................................................................................................................. 217
6.4 Incoterms .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 218
6.5 Commonly Used Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................................... 219

7 References ........................................................................................................................................................................ 221

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 3

 INTRODUCTION

1 Introduction
This reference guide is designed to help engineers in the field of medium voltage select and specify the right MV
equipment for their application.
This guide provides an overview of all the main components in a motor control system, in a format that is readily
understood by people with limited or no experience with motor control in general and soft starters in particular.
We hope this document will help:
 consulting engineers wanting to specify motor control equipment
 technical departments using motor control equipment
 maintenance engineers at locations with soft starters installed
We would welcome your feedback so we can continue to improve this guide.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. The information contained
in this manual is subject to change at any time and without prior notice. In no event will responsibility or liability be
accepted for direct, indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.

© 2012 AuCom Electronics Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

As AuCom is continuously improving its products it reserves the right to modify or change the specification of its products at
any time without notice. The text, diagrams, images and any other literary or artistic works appearing in this document are
protected by copyright. Users may copy some of the material for their personal reference but may not copy or use material
for any other purpose without the prior consent of AuCom Electronics Ltd. AuCom endeavours to ensure that the
information contained in this document including images is correct but does not accept any liability for error, omission or
differences with the finished product.

Page 4 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 MOTORS

2 Motors

2.1 Common types of industrial motors

Induction motors
An induction motor performs two primary functions:
 start - convert electrical energy into mechanical energy in order to overcome the inertia of the load and
accelerate to full operating speed.
 run - convert electrical energy into productive work output to a driven load.
Full voltage starting (also referred to as direct on-line or across-the-line starting) results in a high starting current,
equal to locked rotor current. The locked rotor current (LRC) of a motor depends on the motor design, and is
typically between five and ten times motor full load current (FLC). A value of six times FLC is common. Shaft
loading only affects start time, not LRC.
High motor starting currents can cause voltage fluctuations on the electrical supply system, and electrical supply
authorities often require reduction in motor starting current. Reduced voltage starting of an induction motor
reduces the available starting torque, and loads with demanding start torque requirements may not be compatible
with reduced voltage starting.
When selecting a motor for a specific application, both the start and run characteristics are very important.
Motors consist of two major components:
 The stator consists of magnetic poles created from stator windings located in slots within the frame of the
motor. The full load running characteristics of the motor are determined by the winding configuration and
the contour of the stator slots and laminations. Motor speed is determined by the number of pole pairs
and the supply frequency applied to the stator windings.
 The rotor consists of a cylindrical short circuited winding, embedded within iron laminations. The rotor
winding is often referred to as a squirrel cage. This cage is constructed from a number of bars running
parallel to the motor shaft near the surface of the rotor. The rotor bars are short circuited at each end of
the rotor using shorting rings. The material, position and shape of the rotor bars determines the starting
characteristics of the motor.

The rotor design determines the starting characteristics of the motor. The stator design determines the
running characteristics of the motor.

AC induction motor

When 3-phase supply voltage is applied to the stator winding of an induction motor, a rotating magnetic field is
produced which cuts through the rotor bars. The rotating speed of this magnetic field is referred to as "synchronous
speed".
Interaction between the rotating magnetic field and the rotor bars induces a voltage which causes current to flow in
the rotor bars. This rotor current produces a magnetic field in each rotor bar. Interaction between the stator's
rotating magnetic field and the rotor bar magnetic fields produces a torque which causes the rotor to be driven in
the same rotational direction as the stator magnetic field.
Torque produced by the rotor varies from stationary to full running speed. This torque is primarily a function of the
rotor resistance and leakage reactance. The latter is determined by the difference in rotational speed between stator

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 5

MOTORS

magnetic field and the rotor, otherwise known as slip. Slip is commonly expressed as a percentage of the motor's
synchronous speed.
Motor start performance characteristics can vary greatly depending on rotor design and construction, but in general,
a motor with high locked rotor current will produce low locked rotor torque and vice versa. A high resistance rotor
produces relatively high starting torque but runs at high slip which causes inefficiency. To produce superior starting
and running characteristics, specially shaped rotor bars or double cage rotors are used.

Typical start performance characteristics of an induction motor.

7 x FLC
Full voltage motor current
Full voltage motor torque
6 x FLC 2 x FLT
Load torque (quadratic load, eg
5 x FLC
pump)
Current

Torque
4 x FLC

3 x FLC 1 x FLT

2 x FLC

1 x FLC
03340.B

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Speed

Useful formulae
Motor synchronous speed

Where:
Ns =
f × 60 Ns = synchronous speed (rpm)
p f = mains supply frequency (Hz)
p = number of stator pole pairs
Motor slip speed (%)

Where:
Nslip
(N N r )
= s ×100 Nslip = percentage slip speed (%)
Ns Ns = synchronous speed (rpm)
Nr = rotor speed (rpm)
Motor shaft output power

Where:
N ×T
Po = r r Po = output power (kW)
9550 Nr = rotor shaft speed (rpm)
Tr = rotor torque (Nm)
Motor electrical input power

Where:
Pi = input power (kW)
Pi = 3 × V×I ×cos V = motor line voltage (kV)
I = motor line current (A)
cosØ = motor power factor
Motor efficiency

Where:
eff =
Po
×100 eff = motor efficiency (%)
Pi Po = motor output power (kW)
Pi = motor input power (kW)

Page 6 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 MOTORS

Slip-ring motors
A slip-ring induction motor is also referred to as a wound rotor motor. In principle, the stator construction is the
same as that of a squirrel cage induction motor. The rotor is made up of a set of windings embedded in rotor slots
and brought out to a set of slip-rings. External rotor resistance is then connected to the slip-rings via a brush gear
arrangement. The external rotor resistance is variable and is used for starting the motor.

Slip-ring rotor arrangement

Slip-ring motor installation

KR2 KR1

KM1 R2 R1

1 2 4

13227.A
A B

Three-phase supply Bridging contactors

KM1 Main contactor KR1 First stage contactor
Slip-ring motor KR2 Second stage contactor
A Stator External rotor resistance
B Rotor R1 First stage resistor bank
R2 Second stage resistor bank
A high level of starting torque is produced by matching the rotor resistance with the rotor leakage reactance as the
motor speed increases. At standstill, all the available external rotor resistance is in the circuit. As the motor speed
increases, the external rotor resistance is reduced by using shorting contactors, until all the external resistance is
shorted out. At this stage, the motor has reached full running speed. Motor start current is limited by the relatively
high impedance of the motor due to the external rotor resistance.

The major advantage of a slip-ring motor is that it produces very high starting torque (150-250% of full
load torque) from standstill to full running speed, while consuming a relatively low level of start current
(200-350% of full load current).

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 7

MOTORS

Typical start performance characteristics of a slip-ring motor.

Current
Torque

13187.A 13188.A

Speed Speed

Slip-ring speed control

In some cases, the variable resistance is used for speed control of the load. This method of speed control can cause
erratic fluctuations in speed (if the load demand changes), and heat loss from the resistors causes major inefficiencies.
Compared with using a slip-ring motor for speed control, a better result can be achieved by using a variable
frequency drive (VFD) to operate a standard squirrel cage motor. A VFD typically provides more precise speed
control, as well as being more efficient, less expensive, and easier to install and maintain.

Provided sufficient start torque is developed with a single stage of rotor resistance, soft starters can be successfully
applied to slip-ring motors.
Refer to Slip ring motor control on page 66 for further details.

Page 8 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 MOTORS

Synchronous motors
The construction of a synchronous motor stator is the same as a standard induction motor, although the stator
configuration is such that relatively low operating speeds are common (eg 300-600 rpm).
When 3-phase voltage is applied to the stator windings, a magnetic field is generated which rotates at a synchronous
speed around the stator and rotor. The synchronous speed is determined by the stator construction and frequency
of the supply voltage.
Motor synchronous speed

Where:
Ns =
f × 60 Ns = synchronous speed (rpm)
p f = mains supply frequency (Hz)
p = number of stator pole pairs
The rotor design incorporates a squirrel cage winding combined with a DC excitation winding. This allows the motor
to start as a standard squirrel cage induction motor, reaching a running speed of approximately 95% synchronous
speed. At this point, a DC voltage is applied to the excitation winding via a slip-ring and brush arrangement. A fixed
magnetic field is created in the rotor which locks in with the rotating magnetic field of the stator. The motor shaft
now runs at synchronous speed.

Synchronous motor
Fan inside
Excitation rings (x2)
Three phase stator windings
Rotor with poles and excitation windings
Excitation brushes (x2)

As motor shaft load is increased, the operating power factor of the motor is reduced. This power factor can be
improved by increasing the DC excitation level of the rotor. This behaviour allows the AC synchronous motor to
operate very efficiently at a fixed speed, independent of loading.

Soft starters are suitable for this type of application, but an external DC excitation package is required for
synchronous speed control and operation.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 9

MOTORS

2.2 Motor starting methods

When an induction motor is connected to a full voltage supply, it draws several times its rated current. As the load
accelerates, the available torque usually drops a little and then rises to a peak while the current remains very high
until the motor approaches full speed.

Direct on-line starting

The simplest form of starter is the direct on-line (DOL) starter, consisting of an isolation contactor and motor
overload protection device. DOL starters are extensively used in some industries, but in many cases full voltage
starting is not permitted by the power authority.
Full voltage starting causes a current transition from zero to locked rotor current (LRC) at the instant of contactor
closure. LRC is typically between five and ten times motor FLC. The fast rising current transient induces a voltage
transient in the supply, and causes a voltage deflection of six to nine times that expected under full load conditions.
Full voltage starting also causes a torque transient from zero to locked rotor torque at the instant of contactor
closure. The instantaneous torque application causes a severe mechanical shock to the motor, drive system and the
machine. The damage resulting from the torque transient is more severe than that due to the maximum torque
amplitude.

Current and torque profile for DOL starting

7 x FLC
Full voltage motor current

6 x FLC 2 x FLT
Full voltage motor torque

5 x FLC
Load torque (quadratic load, eg pump)
Current

Torque

4 x FLC

3 x FLC 1 x FLT

2 x FLC

1 x FLC
03340.B

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Speed

DOL starter installation

Main contactor
Overload relay

Page 10 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 MOTORS

Primary resistance starting

Primary resistance starters use resistors connected in series with each phase, between the isolation contactor and
the motor, which limit the start current and torque. The resistors may be wound, cast or liquid resistors.

Primary resistance starter

2 Main contactor
Run contactor
Start resistors
Overload relay

09454.A
3~

1 3 4

The motor current is equal to the line current and the starting torque is reduced by the square of the current
reduction ratio. The current reduction depends on the ratio of the motor impedance to the sum of the added
primary resistance and motor impedance.
As the motor accelerates, the stator impedance increases, resulting in increasing stator voltage with speed. Once the
motor reaches full speed, the resistors are bridged by a second contactor to supply full voltage to the motor.
The initial start voltage is determined by the value of the resistors used. If the resistors are too high in value, there will
be insufficient torque to accelerate the motor to full speed, so the step to full voltage will result in a high current and
torque step.
The reduced voltage start time is controlled by a preset timer which must be correctly set for the application. If the
time is too short, the motor will not reach full speed before the resistors are bridged. Excessive start time results in
unnecessary motor and resistor heating.
Several stages of resistance can be used and bridged in steps to control the current and torque more accurately.
This minimises the magnitude of the current and torque steps.
Primary resistance starters dissipate a lot of energy during start due to the high current through, and the high voltage
across the resistors. For extended times or frequent starts, the resistors are physically large and must be well
ventilated.
Primary resistance starters are closed transition starters, so they are not subject to 'reclose' transients.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 11

MOTORS

Start performance characteristics of a correctly selected primary resistance starter

7 x FLC
Full voltage start current
6 x FLC 2 x FLT
Primary resistance start current
5 x FLC
Full voltage torque
4 x FLC
Primary resistance torque
Current

Torque
3 x FLC 1 x FLT
Load torque
2 x FLC

1 x FLC
13193.A

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Speed

Start performance characteristics of an incorrectly selected primary resistance starter

7 x FLC
Full voltage start current
6 x FLC 2 x FLT
Primary resistance start current
5 x FLC
Full voltage torque
4 x FLC
Primary resistance torque
3 x FLC 1 x FLT
Stall point
Current

Torque

2 x FLC
Current and torque transient
1 x FLC
13190.A

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Speed

How does soft start compare to primary resistance starting?

Compared with primary resistance starters, soft starters are more flexible and reliable.
Primary resistance starters offer limited performance because:
 Start torque cannot be fine-tuned to match motor and load characteristics.
 Current and torque transients occur at each voltage step.
 They are large and expensive.
 Liquid resistance versions require frequent maintenance.
 Start performance changes as the resistance heats up, so multiple or restart situation are not well
controlled.
 They cannot accommodate changing load conditions (eg loaded or unloaded starts).
 They cannot provide soft stop.

Page 12 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 MOTORS

Auto-transformer starting
Auto-transformer starters use an auto-transformer to reduce the voltage during the start period. The transformer
has a range of output voltage taps which can be used to set the start voltage, and the start time is controlled by a
timer.
The motor current is reduced by the start voltage reduction, and further reduced by the transformer action resulting
in a line current less than the actual motor current.
The initial line current is equal to the LRC reduced by the square of the voltage reduction. A motor started on the
fifty percent tap of an auto-transformer will have a line start current of one quarter of LRC and a start torque of one
quarter of LRT. If the start voltage is too low, or the start time is too short, the transition to full voltage will occur
with the motor at less than full speed, resulting in a high current and torque step.
The simplest auto-transformer starters are single step and often control two phases only. More sophisticated
starters may step through two or more voltage steps while accelerating from the initial start tap to full voltage.
Auto-transformer starters are usually rated for infrequent starting duties. Frequent or extended start rated
auto-transformers are large and expensive due to the heating in the transformer.
Auto-transformer starters can be constructed as open transition starters but most commonly the Korndorfer closed
transition configuration is employed to eliminate the 'reclose' transients.

Auto-transformer connection

Run contactor
M Thermal overload
3~
Start contactor (A)
Auto-transformer
Start contactor (B)
09455.A

Start performance characteristics of a correctly selected auto-transformer starter

7 x FLC

Full voltage start current

6 x FLC 2 x FLT

5 x FLC
Auto-transformer start current
Full voltage torque
Current

Torque

4 x FLC

3 x FLC 1 x FLT Auto-transformer torque

2 x FLC Load torque
1 x FLC
13194.A

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Speed

Start performance characteristics of an incorrectly selected auto-transformer starter

7 x FLC

Full voltage start current

6 x FLC 2 x FLT

5 x FLC
Auto-transformer start current
Full voltage torque
Current

Torque

4 x FLC

3 x FLC 1 x FLT Auto-transformer torque

2 x FLC Stall point
1 x FLC Current and torque transient
13195.A

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Speed

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 13

MOTORS

How does soft start compare to auto-transformer starting?

Compared with auto-transformer starters, soft starters are much more flexible and provide a much smoother start.
Auto-transformer starters offer limited performance because:
 They offer only limited ability to adjust start torque to accommodate motor and load characteristics.
 There are still current and torque transients associated with steps between voltages.
 They are large and expensive.
 They are especially expensive if high start frequency is required.
 They cannot accommodate changing load conditions (eg loaded or unloaded starts).
 They cannot provide soft stop.

Page 14 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 MOTORS

Star-Delta starting
Star-delta starters are the most common reduced voltage starter used in industry because of their low cost.
The motor is initially connected in star configuration, then after a preset time the motor is disconnected from the
supply and reconnected in delta configuration. The current and torque in the star configuration are one third of the
full voltage current and torque when the motor is connected in delta.

Star/delta starter installation

Main contactor
Thermal overload
Motor (three-phase)
Delta contactor
Star contactor

09456.A

The star and delta configurations provide fixed levels of current and torque, and cannot be adjusted to suit the
application.
 If the star configuration does not provide enough torque to accelerate the load to full speed, a high starting
torque motor such as a double cage motor should be employed.
 If the motor does not reach full speed in star, the transition to delta configuration will result in a high current
and torque step, defeating the purpose of reduced voltage starting.
Most star-delta starters are open transition starters so the transition from star to delta results in very high current and
torque transients in addition to the high step magnitudes. Closed transition star-delta starters are rarely used due to
the increased complexity and cost. The closed transition starter reduces the 'reclose' effect but does not improve
the controllability of the start parameters.

Start performance characteristics of a star/delta starter

1
7 x FLC 6 Full voltage start current
2 x FLT
Star-delta start current
6 x FLC

5 x FLC
Full voltage torque
4 x FLC
Star-delta torque
3
3 x FLC 1 x FLT
Stall point
2 x FLC
2
Current and torque transient
Current

Torque

5
4
1 x FLC
13196.A

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Speed

How does soft start compare with star/delta starting?

Compared with star/delta starters, soft starters are much more flexible and provide a smooth start with no risk of
transients.
Star/delta starters offer limited performance because:
 Start torque cannot be adjusted to accommodate motor and load characteristics.
 There is an open transition between star and delta connection that results in damaging torque and current
transients.
 They cannot accommodate varying load conditions (eg loaded or unloaded starts).
 They cannot provide soft stop.
The main advantages of star/delta starters are:
 They may be cheaper than a soft starter.
 When used to start an extremely light load, they may limit the start current to a lower level than a soft
starter. However, severe current and torque transients may still occur.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 15

MOTORS

Soft starters
Electronic soft starters control the voltage applied to the motor by means of an impedance in series with each phase
connected to the motor. The impedance is provided by AC switches – reverse parallel connected SCR-diode or
SCR-SCR circuits. The voltage is controlled by varying the conduction angle of the SCRs.

Soft starter control

Main contactor
Electronic soft starter
M
Overload relay
3~

13191.A

1 2 3

The SCR-SCR switch is a symmetric controller, which results in odd order harmonic generation.
The SCR-diode switch is an asymmetric controller, which causes even order harmonic currents to flow in the motor
and supply. Even order harmonics are undesirable for motor control because of the increased losses and heating
induced in the motor and supply transformers.
Electronic soft starters come in two control formats.
 Open loop controllers, which follow a timed sequence. The most common open loop system is timed
voltage ramp, where the voltage begins at a preset start voltage and increases to line voltage at a preset
ramp rate.
 Closed loop controllers, which monitor one or more parameters during the start period and modify the
motor voltage in a manner to control the starting characteristics. Common closed loop approaches are
constant current and current ramp.

Page 16 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 MOTORS

Variable frequency drives (VFD)

A variable frequency drive (VFD) converts AC (50 or 60 Hz) to DC, then converts the DC back to AC, with a
variable output frequency of 0-250 Hz. The running speed of a motor depends on the supply frequency, so
controlling the frequency makes it possible to control the speed of the motor. A VFD can control the speed of the
motor during starting, running and stopping.
VFDs generate significant emissions and harmonics, and a filter is generally required.
VFDs are also called variable speed drives (VSD) or frequency converters.

VFD motor starting

When a VFD starts a motor, it initially applies a low frequency and voltage to the motor. The starting frequency is
typically 2 Hz or less. This avoids the high inrush current that occurs when a motor is started DOL. The VFD
increases the frequency and voltage at a controlled rate to accelerate the load without drawing excessive current.
 the current on the motor side is in direct proportion to the torque that is generated
 the voltage on the motor is in direct proportion to the actual speed
 the voltage on the network side is constant
 the current on the network side is in direct proportion to the power drawn by the motor

VFDs are ideal for applications with an extremely limited supply because the starting current is never more
than the motor FLC.

VFD motor stopping

The stopping sequence is the opposite of the starting sequence. The frequency and voltage applied to the motor
are ramped down at a controlled rate. When the frequency approaches zero, the motor is shut off. A small
amount of braking torque is available to help slow the load, and additional braking torque can be obtained by adding
a braking circuit. With 4-quadrants rectifiers (active-front-end), the VFD is able to brake the load by applying a
reverse torque and returning the energy to the network.
The precise speed control available from a VFD is useful for avoiding water hammering in pipe systems, or for gently
starting and stopping conveyor belts carrying fragile material.

VFD motor running

The ability to control motor speed is a big advantage if there is a need for speed regulation during continuous
running. If the application only requires an extended starting and/or stopping time, a VFD may be more expensive
than necessary.
Running at low speeds for long periods (even with rated torque) risks overheating the motor. If extended low
speed/high torque operation is required, an external fan is usually needed. The manufacturer of the motor and/or
the VFD should specify the cooling requirements for this mode of operation.

VFD bypassed
In some medium voltage motor applications, a VFD is used to start the motor but is bypassed by a contactor or
circuit breaker when running at mains supply frequency.
This means:
motor start current never exceeds the motor full load current. This is very useful on sites where the mains
supply capacity is limited
 the overall motor control system is more reliable because the VFD is only required during starting and
stopping
 if the VFD malfunctions, the motor can still be started and run DOL, via the bypass switch. In this case, the
mains supply must have the capacity to start the motor.
Control of the bypass switch can be automatic or manual.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 17

MOTORS

Bypassed VFD installation

1
Three-phase supply
VFD
F1-3 Motor
K1A VFD input contactor
K1B VFD output contactor
K2 K1A
K2 Bypass contactor
F1-3 Fuses
PR Motor protection relay

3 2
PR

K1B

13228.A

M 3

Operation:
 Contactors K1A and K1B close and the motor is run up to full speed. Once the output of the VFD reaches
main supply frequency, contactors K1A and K1B open. After a short delay, bypass contactor K2 closes.
 Contactors K1B and K2 are electrically and mechanically interlocked. The VFD can be isolated from
operation by racking out contactors K1A and K1B.
 Motor protection relay PR protects the motor when K2 is closed.

Page 18 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

3 Soft Starters
3.1 What is a Soft Starter
A soft starter is an electronic motor controller used on three phase squirrel cage induction motors. During motor
starting, the soft starter controls the voltage or current supplied to the motor. Motor start performance is
optimised by reducing the total start current while optimising the torque produced by the motor. Motor stopping
can also be controlled by ramping down the output voltage over a predetermined time period. This is particularly
useful for eliminating water hammer in pumping applications.
Soft starters use SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers, also called thyristors), arranged back-to-back for each controlled
phase of the soft starter. This provides phase angle control of the voltage waveform in both directions.
Controlling the voltage controls the current supplied to the motor. The stepless control of motor terminal voltage
eliminates the current and torque transients associated with electromechanical forms of reduced voltage starting,
such as star-delta or autotransformer starters.

SCR configuration (per phase)

13477.A
L1 T1

Voltage waveform

Q1 Firing angle
Q2 Conduction angle
13478.A

Q1 Q2

A soft starter designed to control motor voltage is referred to as an open loop controller. A soft starter designed
to control motor current is referred to as a closed loop controller.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 19

SOFT STARTERS

Open loop soft start control

Open loop soft start controllers have no feedback of the starting performance to the controller and follow preset
voltage transitions controlled by timers.

Open loop controller

13473.A
Open loop soft start controllers can use a voltage step or timed voltage ramp approach.
Voltage step controllers (also called pedestal controllers) apply a preset level of voltage at start, then step to full
voltage after a user-defined period. Voltage step starters have little advantage over closed transition
electromechanical starters and are rarely used.

Voltage step soft start control

2
Initial start voltage
Start time
3
1 Full voltage

13475.A

Timed voltage ramp controllers ramp the voltage from a user-defined start voltage to full voltage, at a controlled
rate. Timed voltage ramp is used extensively in low cost soft starters.

Timed voltage ramp control

2
Initial start voltage
Start time
3
1 Full voltage

13476.A

The start voltage and ramp rate are often referred to as torque and acceleration adjustments, but soft start can only
influence torque and acceleration, not provide precise control.
The acceleration rate is determined by the motor and machine inertia. A high inertia load requires a slow ramp
time if the current is to be minimised. If the start voltage rises to quickly, current may approach locked rotor current.
A low inertia load requires a short ramp time. Excessive starting time can result in insufficient voltage for stable
operation once the motor has reached full speed.

Page 20 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Closed loop soft start control

Closed loop soft starters have one or more feedback loops, which monitor characteristics at the motor. The starter
adjusts the voltage to the motor, in order to control the monitored parameters.

Closed loop controller

Current transformer feedback

13474.A
1
Common closed loop systems are:
 Constant Current or Current Limit
 Timed Current Ramp
 Constant Acceleration
Constant current soft start
Constant current starters monitor the starting current. Increasing or decreasing the output voltage increases or
decreases the current supplied to the motor. As the motor accelerates, the stator impedance rises and in order to
maintain a constant current the voltage also rises. The exact relationship between voltage and speed depends on
the motor design.
With a constant current starter, full torque is available as the motor reaches full speed. It is important that the starting
current is high enough to accelerate the motor to full speed under all conditions. If the torque is insufficient for
acceleration at any time during the start, the motor will continue to run at the reduced speed. This will overheat the
motor unless there is excess start time protection.
Timed current ramp soft start
Timed current ramp soft starters increase the current from a selected start level to the maximum start current, at a
controlled rate. This caters for variation in starting torque requirements, or can deliver reduced starting torque
without limiting the maximum starting torque. Typical applications are conveyors which start under varying load
conditions, and pumps which require very low torque at low speed.
This method also suits motors running on generator supplies, as the starting load is gradually applied to the generator
set. This provides stable voltage and frequency control of the generator set during motor starting.
Constant acceleration soft start
Constant acceleration or linear acceleration starters monitor the motor speed, by means of a tacho generator
attached to the motor shaft. The voltage applied to the motor is controlled to deliver a constant rate of acceleration,
over a selected acceleration time. A current limiting circuit can also be used to limit the maximum starting current,
particularly in applications where a potential exists for jammed loads.
1
Torque (% motor full load torque)

700
Full voltage start current
600 200
2 Current limit
500
Full voltage start torque
Current

400
3 Torque output at current limit
300 100
5 Acceleration torque
200 4
Load torque curve
100 6
09677.B

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Speed (%full speed)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 21

SOFT STARTERS

3.2 Benefits
Electrical Benefits
 Minimise start current levels to match application requirements. This reduces overall demand on the
electrical supply.
 Eliminate current transients during motor starting and stopping. This avoids supply voltage dips which can
affect the performance of other equipment and in severe situations, cause equipment failure.
 Reduce the size of electrical transformers, switchgear and cable.
 Reduce maximum demand charges from the electricity supplier.
Mechanical Benefits
 Minimise start torque levels to match application requirements. This eliminates mechanically damaging
torque transients associated with electromechanical starting methods.
 Smooth, stepless torque is applied to the load from the motor shaft. This can:
 reduce pipeline pressure surges and water hammer in pump applications
 eliminate belt slippage associated with belt driven loads
 eliminate belt slap associated with large belt conveyor applications.
 Reduce maintenance and production down-time.

Application Benefits
 Optimise performance for any motor and load combination.
 Soft stop reduces or eliminates water hammer in pump applications.
 Simplicity. The soft starter provides a complete motor control solution in one package. This includes
advanced motor protection, input/output signals for remote control/monitoring and a wide range of
communication options.

Page 22 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

3.3 Anatomy
Key components
Most soft starters have the following main components:
 SCRs (also called thyristors)
 Snubber circuits
 Heatsink
 Fans (optional for increased thermal ratings)
 Busbars
 Current sensors
 Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
 Housing

Example: MVS IP00

3
4 Printed circuit board (PCB)
Housing (IP00 chassis)
Current sensors (CTs)
1 Busbars
Snubber circuits (RC network)
2 5
SCRs and heatsinks
6
13571.A

SCRs
SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers, also called thyristors) are the primary component of any soft starter. The SCR is
a controlled diode that only allows current to flow in one direction.
An SRC has three terminals. When the gate terminal is triggered with a low voltage signal, the SCR is turned on.
This allows current to pass through from the anode to cathode terminals. An SCR is self commutating and current
stops flowing when it reaches the zero point crossing.
A soft starter has at least two SCRs per phase, connected in reverse-parallel configuration so that current can be
controlled in both directions. The soft starter can control one, two or all three phases.
There are two physical styles of SCR:
modular pack SCRs are a self contained reverse-parallel device. These are often found in low voltage soft
starters with a voltage range of 200 VAC to 690 VAC and a current rating less than 300 A.
 disk or hockey puck style devices are a single SCR which needs to be electromechanically configured in
reverse-parallel configuration for soft starter use. This style of SCR is used on higher current rated, low
voltage soft starters with current ratings greater than 300A.
Medium voltage soft starters with an operating voltage range of 2.3kV to13.8kV always use disk style SCRs
connected in series for each half of a phase to obtain the necessary voltage rating.
Modular SCR Disk style ("hockey puck") SCR

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 23

SOFT STARTERS

Snubber circuits
Snubber circuits are used to suppress a phenomenon called notching which occurs at the zero voltage crossing point.
Snubber circuits provide SCR control stability and a level of overvoltage protection.
In the simplest form, a snubber is a resistor-capacitor network connected in parallel across each SCR. Resistors used
for this purpose are typically wire wound, for the necessary power rating. In medium voltage soft starters, grading
resistors are connected in a series-parallel configuration across all SCRs. This divides the voltage across SCR in each
phase evenly.
Basic LV snubber arrangement
C R

SCR

LV supply Motor
SCR
13489.A

R C

Basic MV snubber arrangement

C R C R SCRs
RC snubber network
SCR SCR
Grading resistors

MV supply Motor
SCR SCR

2
R C R C
13490.A

Heatsinks
Heatsinks are designed to efficiently dissipate the heat generated by SCR switching during motor starting and
stopping. Optimum heatsink design maximises the rating of the soft starter by keeping the SCR internal junction
temperature below 130°C.
SCRs are always bonded to a heatsink, using an appropriate thermal paste.
 modular SCRs are bonded to an isolated heatsink arrangement.
 for disk SCRs, the conducting faces of each SCR are compressed against a conducting heatsink face.
Many soft starters reduce the heatsink size by turning the SCRs off at the end of a start and bypassing the SCR
arrangement during motor running.

Page 24 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Fans
Fans are often used in conjunction with SCR/heatsink assemblies to increase the thermal rating of soft starters in
arduous conditions, eg:
 applications requiring high start current and/or times (eg 450%FLC start current for 30 seconds)
 applications with excessive starts per hour (eg >10 starts per hour)
 installations with excessive operating ambient temperatures (eg 45-60°C)
Busbars
Busbars are used to connect the motor and the mains supply to the SCR power assembly. Busbars are sized
according to the soft starter's maximum current rating. For lower current rated soft starters, aluminium busbars are
common. Higher current applications use tinned copper busbars to minimise the cross sectional area.
There are various methods for connecting conductors to busbars. Low current terminations may use small cage
clamps. High current terminations may use large spreader plates.
To ensure a good electrical connection when clamping together two conducting faces:
 clean all conducting surfaces so they are free from oil, grease and other contaminants. Use an appropriate
industrial solvent for best results.
 lightly buff the mating surfaces of busbars, spreader plates, cable lugs, etc, then remove any leftover residue
 apply an approved electrical jointing compound to all mating surfaces
 use the correct type and size of fasteners and tighten to the specified torque
 insulate bare exposed electrical joints according to local electrical regulations

Current sensors
Soft starters which control motor start current or provide a motor protection function will have some form of
current sensing on the controlled phases. If only two phases are monitored, the current in the third phase is normally
surmised using vector calculation.
Current transformers are widely used, but other forms of current sensing are becoming mode widely used.
PCBs
Compact printed circuit boards are used to mount all the necessary electronic firmware, such as:
 digital microprocessors for I/O function, SCR firing control, motor protection function, communications,
etc
 SCR firing circuits
 current sensing input circuits (necessary for certain soft starter types)
 metering circuits
 user interface
 digital and analog input and output circuits
 terminals for customer interfacing
 communication port options
Some soft starter manufacturers have protective conformal coating as an option. Conformal coating protects PCBs
from moisture and general dust and grime. In aggressive gaseous and chemical environments, the soft starter should
be installed in a suitable, totally sealed enclosure.

Conformal coating is standard on all AuCom soft starters.

Housing
Industrial products are constructed to provide a certain level of electrical and mechanical protection against foreign
solid objects and the ingress of moisture. IEC 60529 and NEMA 250 are the main international standards which rate
the level of protection that a product provides.
Open chassis soft starters
Open chassis (gear tray style, IP00) starters have very little protection from the outside world and must be mounted
in a suitable electrical enclosure. This style is common with medium voltage soft starters, which need to be integrated
into an adequately rated switchgear cabinet along with other associated switchgear.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 25

SOFT STARTERS

Enclosed soft starters

Enclosed soft starters have varying levels of electrical and mechanical protection from the outside world. Housings
are made from a combination of metals, alloys and plastics with many different finishes. This style is more common
amongst low voltage soft starter products. In some cases, the housing provides enough protection that the soft
starter can be wall mounted and does not have to be fitted inside an electrical enclosure.
Common functionality and features
Soft starters vary widely in functionality and choosing the correct product depends mainly on the performance and
features required. Serviceability and product support are also important factors. In fewer cases, the main
consideration is product cost.
The most common features of industrial soft starters can be grouped into functional categories:
SCR control
A soft starter can control one, two or three phases:
 Single phase controllers - These devices reduce torque shock at start but do not reduce start current. Also
known as torque controllers, these devices must be used in conjunction with a direct on-line starter.
 Two phase controllers - These devices eliminate torque transients and reduce motor start current. The
uncontrolled phase has slightly higher current than the two controlled phases during motor starting. They
are suitable for all but severe loads.
 Three phase controllers - These devices control all three phases, providing the optimum in soft start
control. Three phase control should be used for severe starting situations.
Common control methods include:
 Open loop, voltage ramp control
 Closed loop, current control
 Soft stopping
 Special control formats
Adaptive control
AuCom has developed a special control format known as Adaptive Control.
Adaptive Control is a new intelligent motor control technique that controls current to the motor in order to start
or stop the motor within a specified time and using a selected profile.
For soft starting, selecting an adaptive profile that matches the inherent profile of the application can help smooth
out acceleration across the full start time. Selecting a dramatically different profile can somewhat neutralise the
inherent profile.
For soft stopping, adaptive control can be useful in extending the stopping time of low inertia loads.

Page 26 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

The soft starter monitors the motor's performance during each start, to improve control for future soft starts. The
best profile will depend on the exact details of each application. If you have particular operational requirements,
discuss details of your application with your local supplier.
4
100%
Adaptive start profile:
90%
80% Early acceleration
70%
Constant acceleration
60% 1
50% Late acceleration
Motor speed

40% 2
30%
Start time
20%
3

04827.C
10%
0

4
100%
Adaptive stop profile:
90%
80% Early deceleration
70% Constant deceleration
60% 1 2 3
50% Late deceleration
Motor speed

40%
Stop ramp time
30%
20% 04835.C

10%
0

Inputs/Outputs
 Digital and analog inputs with fixed or programmable functions
 Relay or analog outputs with fixed or programmable functions
 PT100 or thermistor inputs with adjustable set points
 Communication ports for remote control and status monitoring
Protections
Protection ANSI protection code
Under/ Overvoltage 27 / 59
Mains frequency 81
Phase sequence 46
Phase loss 46
Motor overload (electronic thermal model) 49 / 51
Time-overcurrent (I2t) 51
Instantaneous overcurrent (shearpin or locked rotor) 50
Ground fault 50G
Undercurrent 37
Current imbalance 46 / 60
SCR temperature 26
SCR shorted 3
Motor thermistor 26 / 49
PT100 26 / 49
Excess start time (stall at start) 48
Excess starts per hour 66
Power loss 32
Auxiliary input trips 86 / 97
Battery/clock failure 3
For additional information, refer to ANSI protection codes.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 27

SOFT STARTERS

Local control and feedback

 local keypad
 emergency stop actuator
 alphanumeric or graphical display
 multi-language interfacing
 status LEDs
 motor and starter monitoring data
 metering data
 event counters
 data logging
Communication options
 signal level protocols (eg ASi, InterBus-S)
 serial protocols (eg DeviceNet, Modbus RTU, Profibus DP)
 Ethernet protocols (eg EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, ProfiNet)
 fibre optic linking (provides superior EMC and LV/MV isolation)
Special Functions
 Internally bypassed (when starter is in run state)
 Dynamic braking
 Slow speed forward and reverse operation (ie: jogging)
 Auto reset and restart (on selected trip types)
 Auto start and stop (timer or clock)
 Slip-ring (wound rotor) motor control
 Synchronous motor control
 In-line (3 wire) or inside delta (6 wire) motor connection
What is an inside delta connection?
Inside delta connection (also called six-wire connection) places the soft starter SCRs in series with each motor
winding. This means that the soft starter carries only phase current, not line current. This allows the soft starter to
control a motor of larger than normal full load current.
When using an inside delta connection, a main contactor or shunt trip MCCB must also be used to disconnect the
motor and soft starter from the supply in the event of a trip.

KM1

Q1
or
12996.A

Inside delta connection:

 Simplifies replacement of star/delta starters because the existing cabling can be used.
 May reduce installation cost. Soft starter cost will be reduced but there are additional cabling and main
contactor costs. The cost equation must be considered on an individual basis.
Only motors that allow each end of all three motor windings to be connected separately can be controlled using the
inside delta connection method.
Not all soft starters can be connected in inside delta.

Page 28 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

3.4 AuCom Medium Voltage Soft Starters

MVS Soft Starter
Overview
The MVS provides compact and robust soft start solutions for control of medium voltage motors. MVS soft starters
provide a complete range of motor and system protection features and have been designed for reliable performance
in the most demanding installation situations.
Each IP00 MVS soft starter comprises two elements:
 a power assembly
 a controller module
The power assembly and controller module are supplied as a pair and share the same serial number. Care should
be taken during installation to ensure the correct controller and power assembly are used together.
Each MVS is also supplied with two fibre-optic cables, to connect the controller module to the power assembly, and
three non-conduction lead assemblies, allowing the soft starter to be tested with a low-voltage motor (< 500 VAC).

Feature List
Starting Comprehensive feedback
 Constant current  Starter status LEDs
 Current ramp  Date and time stamped event logging
Stopping  Operational counters (starts, hours-run, kWh)
 Coast to stop  Performance monitoring (current, voltage, power
 Soft stop factor, kWh)
Protection  User-programmable monitoring screen
 Under/ Overvoltage  Multi-level password protection
 Mains frequency  Emergency stop push button
 Phase sequence Power Connection
 Shorted SCR  50 A to 600 A, nominal
 Motor overload (thermal model)  2300 VAC to 7200 VAC
 Instantaneous overcurrent (two stages) Accessories (optional)
 Time-overcurrent  DeviceNet, Modbus or Profibus communication
 Ground fault interfaces
 Undercurrent  Synchronous motor control
 Current imbalance  PC Software
 Motor thermistor  Overvoltage protection
 Excess start time  Control supply transformer
 Power circuit  MV/LV Control transformer
 Auxiliary trip
Extensive input and output options
 Remote control inputs
(3 x fixed, 2 x programmable)
 Relay outputs
(3 x fixed, 3 x programmable)
 Analog output
(1 x programmable)
 Serial port (with module)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 29

SOFT STARTERS

Key Features
MVS soft starters offer several special functions to ensure ease of use and to provide optimal motor control in all
environments and applications.
Customisable Protection
The MVS offers comprehensive protection to ensure safe operation of the motor and soft starter. The protection
characteristics can be customised extensively to match the exact requirements of the installation.
Advanced Thermal Modelling
Intelligent thermal modelling allows the soft starter to predict whether the motor can successfully complete a start.
The MVS uses information from previous starts to calculate the motor's available thermal capacity, and will only
permit a start which is predicted to succeed.
Comprehensive Event and Trip Logging
The MVS has a 99-place event log to record information on soft starter operation. A separate trip log stores
detailed information about the last eight trips.
Informative Feedback Screens
A digital display screen allows the MVS to display important information clearly. Comprehensive metering
information, details of starter status and last start performance allow easy monitoring of the starter's performance at
all times.
Dual Parameter Set
The MVS can be programmed with two separate sets of operating parameters. This allows the soft starter to
control the motor in two different starting and stopping configurations.
The secondary motor settings are ideal for conventional (squirrel-cage) motors which may start in two different
conditions (such as loaded and unloaded conveyors).

NOTE
MVS soft starters are not suitable for controlling two separate motors. The secondary parameter set
should only be used for a secondary configuration of the primary motor.
The MVS will use the secondary motor settings to control a start when instructed via a programmable input.
Fibre Optics
The MVS uses two-line fibre optic connections between the low voltage control module and the high voltage power
assembly for electrical isolation. This fibre optic link simplifies installation of chassis mount MVS starters into custom
panels.
MVS Power Assembly
The MVS power assembly is a very robust and compact design, minimising panel space requirements. The unique
draw-out design simplifies general maintenance and servicing.
MVS power assembly
Phase arms extend via built-in runner,
including balance resistors, snubbers and
gate drive.
Small footprint and depth saves space.
Conformal coating on all PCBs for
protection in environments up to Pollution
Degree 3.
Current measured on all three phases.
Bypass terminals retain motor protection.
Convenient earth points.

Mounted inside frame to ensure sufficient

clearance.
Compact modular design as a single unit.

Page 30 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

General Technical Data

Supply
Mains Voltage
MVSxxxx-V02 ....................................................................................................................................................... 2.3 kV Phase-phase
MVSxxxx-V03 ....................................................................................................................................................... 3.3 kV Phase-phase
MVSxxxx-V04 ....................................................................................................................................................... 4.2 kV Phase-phase
MVSxxxx-V06 ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.6 kV Phase-phase
MVSxxxx-V07 ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.2 kV Phase-phase
Rated Frequency (fr) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 50/60 Hz
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (U p)
MVSxxxx-V02 ~ 04 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 45 kV
MVSxxxx-V06 ~ V07 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 45 kV
Rated power frequency withstand voltage (Ud)
MVSxxxx-V02 ~ V04 ................................................................................................................................................................. 11.5 kV
MVSxxxx-V06 ~ V07 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 20 kV
Rated normal current (lr)
MVS0080-Vxx ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 80 A
MVS0159-Vxx ................................................................................................................................................................................... 159 A
MVS0230-Vxx ................................................................................................................................................................................... 230 A
MVS0321-Vxx ................................................................................................................................................................................... 321 A
MVS0500-Vxx ................................................................................................................................................................................... 500 A
MVS0600-Vxx ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 600 A
Rated short-time withstand current (symmetrical RMS, lk) ................................................................................................ 48 kA 1
Form Designation ................................................................................................... Bypassed semiconductor motor starter form 1
Control Inputs
Start (Terminals C23, C24) ............................................................................................................................. 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Stop (Terminals C31, C32) ............................................................................................................................. 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Reset (Terminals C41, C42) ........................................................................................................................... 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Input A (Terminals C53, C54) ....................................................................................................................... 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Input B (Terminals C63, C64) ........................................................................................................................ 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Motor Thermistor (Terminals B4, B5)................................................................................................................... Trip point > 2.4 k
NOTE
All control inputs are potential free. Do not apply external voltage to these inputs.

Low Voltage Supply

Rated Voltage .................................................................................................................................................. 110 ~130 or 220 ~ 240 V
Rated Frequency ................................................................................................................................................................................. 50/60 Hz
Typical power consumption .................................................................................................................................... 70 W continuous 2
Outputs
Relay Outputs ................................................................................................................................................. 10 A @ 250 VAC resistive
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 6 A @ 250 VAC 15 p.f. 0.3
10 A @ 30 VDC resistive
Outputs on interface PCB
Main Contactor (13, 14) ........................................................................................................................................ Normally Open
Bypass Contactor (23, 24) ..................................................................................................................................... Normally Open
Run Output/ PFC (33, 34) .................................................................................................................................... Normally Open
Outputs on Controller
Output Relay A (43, 44) ........................................................................................................................................ Normally Open
Output Relay B (51, 52, 54) ...................................................................................................................................... Changeover
Output Relay C (61, 62, 64) ........................................................................................................................................ Changeover
Analog Output (B10, B11) .................................................................................................................................. 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
Environmental
Degree of Protection
Power Assembly .................................................................................................................................................................................. IP00
Controller ....................................................................................................................................................................... IP54/ NEMA 12
Operating Temperature .................................................................................. - 10 ˚C to + 60 ˚C, above 40˚C with derating
Storage Temperature .................................................................................................................................................. - 25 ˚C to + 80 ˚C
Humidity ..................................................................................................................................................... 5% to 95% Relative Humidity
Pollution Degree ............................................................................................................................................................ Pollution Degree 3

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 31

SOFT STARTERS

Vibration .................................................................................................................................................................... Designed to IEC 60068

EMC Emission
Equipment Class (EMC) ..................................................................................................................................................................... Class A
Conducted Radio Frequency Emission .................................................................... 10 kHz to 150 kHz: < 120 - 69 dB µV
0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz: < 79 dB µV
0.5 MHz to 30 MHz: < 73 dB µV
Radiated Radio Frequency Emission .................................................................... 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz: < 80-50 dB µV/m
30 MHz to 100 MHz: < 60-54 dB µV/m
100 MHz to 2000 MHz: < 54 dB µV/m
This product has been designed as Class A equipment. Use of this product in domestic environments may cause
radio interference, in which case the user may be required to employ additional mitigation methods.
EMC Immunity
Electrostatic Discharge ............................................................................................... 6 kV contact discharge, 8 kV air discharge
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field .................................................................................. 80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 10 V/m
Fast Transients 5/50 ns (main and control circuits) ....................................................... 2 kV line to earth, 1 kV line to line
Surges 1.2/50 µs (main and control circuits) ................................................................. 2 kV line to earth, 1 kV line to line
Voltage dip and short time interruption (safe shutdown) ........................................ 5000 ms (at 0% nominal voltage)
Standards Approvals
C .................................................................................................................................................................................. EMC requirements
CE ...................................................................................................................................................................................... EMC EU Directive
1
Short circuit current, with appropriate R rated fuses fitted.
2
Excludes contactors and/or circuit breakers.

Page 32 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Power Circuit Configuration

MVS power circuit with main contactor, bypass contactor, main isolator/ earth switch, R Rated fuses and control
supply.

2
A2 A3

A1 C73
3
+10
110-130 VAC A2 C74 K2
-15

220-240 VAC +10 A3 13

-15
14 K1
23
24 K2

33
34

A11 A12 TX RX
(Wh) (Bk)

(Bk) (Wh)
A11 A12 RX TX
C23 43

C24 44

C31 54

C32 52

C41 51
C42 64
62
C53
5 61
C54
C63
C64

B4 B10
+
B5 B11
-
A4
03223.F

A5

A1 Power assembly A4 Controller

1 3 Phase 50/60 Hz Supply 5 Remote control inputs
Q1 Main isolator/Earth switch C23~C24 Start
F1-3 R-Rated protection fuses C31~C32 Stop
K1 Main contactor C41~C42 Reset
K2 Bypass contactor C53~C54 Programmable input A
2 To motor C63~C64 Programmable input B
A2 Control voltage terminals 6 Programmable outputs
3 Control supply 43, 44 Programmable Relay output A
A3 Power interface PCB 51, 52, 54 Programmable Relay output B
4 Relay outputs 61, 62, 64 Programmable Relay output C
C73~C74 Bypass contactor feedback signal 7 Motor thermistor input
13~14 Main contactor K1 8 Analog output
23~24 Bypass contactor K2 A5 Communications module (optional)
33~34 Run output (PFC)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 33

SOFT STARTERS

MVX Soft Starter

Overview
The MVX provides compact and robust soft start solutions for control of medium voltage motors. MVX soft starters
provide a complete range of motor and system protection features and have been designed for reliable performance
in the most demanding installation situations.
Each MVX soft starter comprises:
 a Phase Cassette
 a Controller module
The Phase Cassette and Controller module are supplied as a pair and share the same serial number. Care should be
taken during installation to ensure the correct Controller and Phase Cassette are used together.

NOTE
Fibre-optic cables are only supplied in IP00 variants of the MVX soft starter. In all other MVX soft
starters, this is part of the main assembly.

Feature List
Starting Comprehensive feedback
 Constant current  Digital display with multi-language support
 Current ramp  Controller buttons for quick access to common tasks
Stopping  Starter status LEDs
 Coast to stop  Date and time stamped event logging
 Soft stop  Operational counters (starts, hours-run, kWh)
Protection  Performance monitoring (current, voltage, power factor,
 Under/ Overvoltage kWh)
 Mains frequency  User-programmable monitoring screen
 Phase sequence  Multi-level password protection
 Shorted SCR  Emergency stop
 Motor overload (thermal model) Power Connection
 Instantaneous overcurrent  15 A to 800 A, nominal
 Time-overcurrent  2200 VAC to 11000 VAC
 Ground fault Accessories (optional)
 Undercurrent  DeviceNet, Modbus, Profibus or USB communication
 Current imbalance interfaces
 Motor thermistor  PC Software
 Excess start time  RTD relay
 Power circuit  Motor Protection Relay
 Auxiliary trip  Predictive Maintenance Module (PMM)
Extensive input and output options
 Remote control inputs
(3 x fixed, 2 x programmable)
 Relay outputs
(3 x fixed, 3 x programmable)
 Analog output
(1 x programmable)
 Serial port

Page 34 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Key features
MVX soft starters offer several special functions to ensure ease of use and to provide optimal motor control in all
environments and applications.
Customisable Protection
The MVX offers comprehensive protection to ensure safe operation of the motor and soft starter. The protection
characteristics can be customised extensively to match the exact requirements of the installation.
Advanced Thermal Modelling
Intelligent thermal modelling allows the soft starter to predict whether the motor can successfully complete a start.
The MVX uses information from previous starts to calculate the motor's available thermal capacity, and will only
permit a start which is predicted to succeed.
Comprehensive Event and Trip Logging
The MVX has a 99-place event log to record information on soft starter operation. A separate trip log stores
detailed information about the last eight trips.
Informative Feedback Screens
A digital display screen allows the MVX to display important information clearly. Comprehensive metering
information, details of starter status and last start performance allow easy monitoring of the starter's performance at
all times.
Dual Parameter Set
The MVX can be programmed with two separate sets of operating parameters. This allows the soft starter to
control the motor in two different starting and stopping configurations.
The secondary motor settings (parameter groups 9 and 10) are ideal for dual speed motors or conventional
(squirrel-cage) motors which may start in two different conditions (such as loaded and unloaded conveyors).
The MVX will use the secondary motor settings to control a start when instructed via a programmable input (refer
to parameters 6A and 6F Input A or B Function).
Fibre Optics
The MVX uses two-line fibre optic connections (per phase) between the low voltage control module and the high
voltage phase cassette for electrical isolation. This fibre optic link simplifies installation of chassis mount MVX starters
into custom panels.
MVX Phase Cassette
The MVX phase cassette is a robust and extremely compact design, for easy integration into a panel enclosure. The
unique draw-out design simplifies general maintenance and servicing.
A service lifting trolley is supplied with each MVX panel or phase cassette, for easy installation and removal.

MVX phase cassette

GP06 and air insulation.

Small footprint IP00 starter.
Self-contained phase cassette.
Standard 150 mm pole centres.
Isolated control via fibre optic
connections.
Rack-in/rack-out phase cassettes.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 35

SOFT STARTERS

General Technical Data

Supply
Mains Voltage
MVXxxxx-V11 ....................................................................................................................................................... 11 kV Phase-phase
Rated Frequency (fr) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 50/60 Hz
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (U p)
MVXxxxx-V11 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 75 kV
Rated power frequency withstand voltage (Ud)
MVXxxxx-V11 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 42 kV
Rated short-time withstand current (symmetrical RMS) (lk)
MVXxxxx-V11 .................................................................................................................................................. 31.5 kA for 100 ms 1
Form Designation ................................................................................................. Bypassed semiconductor motor starter form 1
Control Inputs
Start (Terminals C23, C24) ............................................................................................................................. 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Stop (Terminals C31, C32) ............................................................................................................................. 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Reset (Terminals C41, C42) ........................................................................................................................... 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Input A (Terminals C53, C54) ....................................................................................................................... 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Input B (Terminals C63, C64) ........................................................................................................................ 24 VDC, 8 mA approx
Motor Thermistor (Terminals B4, B5) ........................................................................................................... Trip point > 2.8 k
NOTE
All control inputs are potential free. Do not apply external voltage to these inputs.

Low Voltage Supply

Rated Voltage
MVXxxxx-V11 ............................................................................................................................................................... 85 ~ 275 VAC
Rated Frequency ................................................................................................................................................................................. 50/60 Hz
Typical power consumption - MVXxxxx-V11
Start .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 300 W
Stop ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 W
Outputs
Relay Outputs ................................................................................................................................................. 10 A @ 250 VAC resistive
.................................................................................................................................................................. 6 A @ 250 VAC AC15 p.f. 0.3
10 A @ 30 VDC resistive
Outputs on interface PCB
Main Contactor (13, 14) ........................................................................................................................................ Normally Open
Bypass Contactor (23, 24) ..................................................................................................................................... Normally Open
Run Output/ PFC (33, 34) .................................................................................................................................... Normally Open
Outputs on Controller
Output Relay A (43, 44) ........................................................................................................................................ Normally Open
Output Relay B (51, 52, 54) ...................................................................................................................................... Changeover
Output Relay C (61, 62, 64) ........................................................................................................................................ Changeover
Analog Output (B10, B11) .................................................................................................................................. 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
Environmental
Degree of Protection
Phase Cassette ...................................................................................................................................................................................... IP00
Controller (mounted on a panel) ...................................................................................................................... IP54/ NEMA 12
Operating Environment
IEC60721-3-3: IE34: Climatic 3K4 ................................................................... -5 °C to 40 °C, with derating to 55 °C
Relative Humidity .................................................................................................................................................................. 5% to 95%
Storage Environment
IEC60721-3-1: IE12 ..................................................................................................................................................... -5 °C to 55 °C
Relative Humidity .................................................................................................................................................................. 5% to 95%
Pollution Degree ............................................................................................................................................................ Pollution Degree 2
Vibration ................................................................................................................................................................................ IEC 60068-2-6 Fc
EMC Emission
Equipment Class (EMC) ..................................................................................................................................................................... Class A
Conducted Radio Frequency Emission .................................................................... 10 kHz to 150 kHz: < 120 - 69 dB µV
0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz: < 79 dB µV

Page 36 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

0.5 MHz to 30 MHz: < 73 dB µV

Radiated Radio Frequency Emission .................................................................... 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz: < 80-50 dB µV/m
30 MHz to 100 MHz: < 60-54 dB µV/m
100 MHz to 2000 MHz: < 54 dB µV/m
EMC Immunity
Electrostatic Discharge ............................................................................................... 6 kV contact discharge, 8 kV air discharge
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field .................................................................................. 80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 10 V/m
Fast Transients 5/50 ns (main and control circuits) ....................................................... 2 kV line to earth, 1 kV line to line
Surges 1.2/50 µs (main and control circuits) ................................................................. 2 kV line to earth, 1 kV line to line
Voltage dip and short time interruption ............................................ 5000 ms (at 0% nominal voltage safe shutdown)
Standards Approvals
C .................................................................................................................................................................................. EMC requirements
CE ...................................................................................................................................................................................... EMC EU Directive
1
Short circuit current, with appropriate protection.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 37

SOFT STARTERS

Power Circuit Configuration (with Contactors)

MVX power circuit with fused main contactor and bypass contactor.
K2

K1 A1
CT1-3 T1
L1 T1

T2
L2 T2 M
3
L3 T3 T3

U1 Q3

A3

2 3
3

11082.B
A1 Phase cassette L1-L3 Input power terminals (supply side)
1 3 Phase 50/60 Hz Supply 2 Motor
K1 Main contactor (fused/ withdrawable) Q3 Earth switch
K2 Bypass contactor (fixed) T1-T3 Output power terminals (motor side)
CT1-3 Current transformers (x3) A3 Power interface PCB
U1 Metal oxide varistors (MOVs) 3 Current transformer inputs

Power Circuit Configuration (with Circuit Breakers)

MVX power circuit with main circuit breaker and bypass circuit breaker.

Q1 A1
CT1-3 T1
L1 T1

T2
L2 T2 M
3
L3 T3 T3

2
U1
Q3

A3

4 1

2 3
3
11083.B

A1 Phase cassette 2 Motor

1 3 Phase 50/60 Hz Supply Q3 Earth switch
Q1 Main circuit breaker (withdrawable) T1-T3 Output power terminals (motor side)
Q2 Bypass circuit breaker (fixed) A3 Power interface PCB
CT1-3 Current transformers (x3) 3 Current transformer inputs
U1 Metal oxide varistors (MOVs) 4 Motor protection relay (MPR)
L1-L3 Input power terminals (supply side)

Page 38 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Enclosures
MVX soft starters can be installed easily into standard enclosures to provide a complete motor control cabinet.
The compact size of the power assembly leaves room for auxiliary equipment to be installed.
The phase cassette should be mounted at the bottom of the enclosure, and the Controller can be mounted on the
front panel. The diagrams below illustrate a possible configuration for installation.

2 5

1 6
3
7

8
4

11081.C
9

Front view Side view Rear view

1 Controller compartment 6 Bypass contactor/ circuit breaker
2 Upper LV compartment 7 Surge arrester
3 Main contactor/ circuit breaker compartment 8 Phase cassette power connections
4 Phase cassette 9 Earth switch
5 Input supply terminals

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 39

SOFT STARTERS

Soft starter communication options

AuCom medium voltage soft starters can connect easily to Modbus, Profibus or DeviceNet communication
networks, using simple add-on communication interfaces.
All communication interfaces allow you to:
 control the soft starter
 monitor the starter's operational or trip status
 monitor the starter's current level and motor temperature (using the motor thermal model)
Some protocols also allow you to read and write soft starter parameters.
For installations with no existing network, AuCom also offers WinMaster, a PC-based software program which
allows control, monitoring and parameter management via an RS485 or USB connection.

Modbus Interface
MVS and MVX soft starters can operate as slaves on a Modbus network via a Modbus Interface.

Soft starter

1 2 Modbus interface
-
B1 RS485 connection onto a Modbus RTU
network
GND
B2 3
13013.A

+
B3

 The Modbus Interface is powered by the soft starter.

 Each soft starter requires a separate Modbus Interface.
 A Modbus RTU network can support up to 31 Modbus Interfaces as slaves.
 The interface is configured using 8-way DIP switches. For more information on using the Modbus Interface,
refer to the Modbus Interface instructions.
Profibus Interface
MVS and MVX soft starters can connect to a Profibus network using the Profibus Interface.

Soft starter

1 2 Profibus interface

Standard DB9 connection

Profibus DP (3-wire network cable)

3 4
13015.A

 The Profibus Interface requires an external 24 VDC supply.

 Each soft starter requires a separate Profibus Interface.
 A Profibus DP network can support up to 31 Profibus Interfaces as slaves.
 The Profibus node address is selected using two rotary switches on the interface. The interface
automatically detects the data rate.
 The GSD installation file is available from the AuCom website. For more information on using the Profibus
Interface, refer to the Profibus Interface instructions.

Tested and certified by Profibus.

Page 40 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

DeviceNet Interface
MVS and MVX soft starters can connect to a DeviceNet network using the DeviceNet Interface.

Soft starter

DeviceNet Interface
1 2
RD
(V+) Standard 5-wire connection onto a
WH
(CAN-H) DeviceNet network 120  termination
(SHIELD) resistors are required at each end of the
3
BU
(CAN-L) network cable
13016.A

(V-)
BK

 The Devicenet Interface is powered from the network.

 Each soft starter requires a separate DeviceNet Interface.
 A DeviceNet network can support up to 63 DeviceNet Interfaces as slaves.
 The DeviceNet node address (MAC ID) and data rate are selected using three rotary switches on the
interface.
 The EDS installation file is available from the AuCom website. For more information on using the
DeviceNet Interface, refer to the DeviceNet Interface instructions.
CONFORMANCE TESTED Tested and certified by ODVA.

Ethernet options
Industrial plant automation is rapidly moving towards Ethernet based protocols. Ethernet is a real-time, high speed
technology which provides a seamless and unified system linking information from the factory and plant floors
through to the corporate environment. A major advantage of Ethernet based protocols is their accessibility via the
internet.
Industrial Ethernet protocols use the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model developed by the International
Standards Organisation (ISO). The standard protocol stack consists of 7 layers, covering the protocol requirements
of all industrial automation systems.

Seven-layer OSI model

Application Layer

Presentation Layer

Session Layer

Transport Layer

Network Layer

Data Link Layer

Physical Layer

In basic terms, industrial Ethernet protocols use a common industrial protocol at the application layer (eg Modbus
RTU, Profibus DP or DeviceNet)). This is encapsulated within TCP/IP protocol headers (layers 4 and 3) for
transport over a physical Ethernet network (via layers 2 and 1).
AuCom is developing Ethernet based communication options for use with its medium voltage soft starter products.
These options will be certified to the relevant IEC, ODVA and Profibus international standards.
 Modbus TCP (Modbus RTU over Ethernet)
 ProfiNet (Profibus DP over Ethernet)
 Ethernet/IP (DeviceNet over Ethernet)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 41

SOFT STARTERS

Predictive Maintenance Module (PMM)

AuCom’s PMM Predictive Maintenance Module provides an easy-to-use solution for maintenance planning. Using
leading-edge condition monitoring techniques, the PMM can pinpoint equipment failure 2-3 months in advance.
The PMM can be used with a wide range of applications, from pumps and fans to compressors and crushers.
By directly monitoring the voltage and current waveforms at the motor, PMM can quickly and reliably detect changes
in the characteristics, and reports these through a streamlined, easy to understand interface. Because the PMM uses
a model-based fault detection and diagnostic system, it is largely immune to noise, making it ideally suited to erratic
loads.
PMM can detect and identify a very wide range of mechanical, electrical, operational and efficiency problems,
affecting both the load and the motor itself:
 Mechanical: loose foundation or components; imbalance; misalignment; mechanical looseness;
deterioration of the couplings, bearings or gearbox
 Electrical: loose windings; stator fault; insulation and capacitor breakdown; supply problems; damaged rotor
bars; bad connections; phase imbalance
 Operational: abnormal loads, cavitation, filter blocking
 Electrical performance: power factor; active/reactive power; Vrms/Irms (3 phase); voltage or current
imbalance; frequency; total harmonic distortion

Page 42 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

3.5 Selection Guidelines

Considerations
The following information is required to select the starter appropriately. This information is required regardless of
whether you are integrating an IP00 soft starter into a custom-built enclosure or choosing a complete soft starter
panel option.
Information IP00 Soft Starter Soft Starter Panel
Operating voltage (U)
Operating current (I)
Expected start current (ISTR)
Expected start time (tSTR)
Expected stop time (tSTP)
Ambient temperature (TA)
Altitude (Alt)
Switchgear requirements
Incoming and motor supply configuration
Customer specific requirements

Operating Voltage, U (kV)

Operating voltage is the voltage (kV) of the network where the equipment is installed, and is the line voltage applied
across the soft starter's power terminals L1, L2, L3.
The operating voltage will dictate the rated voltage Ur (kV) for the equipment to be used.
AuCom solutions are designed to conform to the insulation requirements of IEC 62271-1, where:
 the power frequency withstand voltage Ud (kV rms, 1 minute) simulates high level voltage surges on the
main supply line at standard frequency;
 the rated impulse withstand voltage Up (kV peak) simulates a high level voltage transient induced on the
main supply from a lightning strike. This is a 1.2/50 s transient wave.
IP00 Panel
Operating Rated Voltage Power Impulse Rated Voltage Power Impulse
Voltage U (kV) Ur (kV) Frequency withstand Up Ur (kV) Frequency withstand Up
withstand Ud (kV peak) withstand Ud (kV peak)
(kV rms, 1 min) (kV rms, 1 min)
2.3 2.3 11.5 45
3.3 3.3 11.5 45 4.2 11.5 45
4.2 4.2 11.5 45
6~6.6 6.6 20 45 7.2 20 45
7.2 7.2 20 45
11 12 42 75 12 42 75

Operating Current, I (A)

The maximum operating current (I) of a soft starter installation is the full load current (FLC) of the motor.
The soft starter's rated current Ir (A) must be equal to or greater than the motor FLC after considering the following
operating parameters:
ISTR expected start current (percentage of motor FLC)
tSTR expected start time (seconds)
tSTP expected stop time (seconds)
SPH starts per hour
TA ambient temperature (degrees celsius)
Alt installation altitude (metres)
Expected start current and time can be based on typical requirements for a particular load, or can be calculated using
a fully engineered solution. AuCom uses a purpose-designed selection software to select appropriate soft starter
models.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 43

SOFT STARTERS

Medium voltage starter selection software

Page 44 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Switchgear Requirements
MVS Panel Options
The MVS soft starter is suitable for operating voltages between 2.3 kV ~ 7.2 kV and currents  600 A, and can be
supplied in switchgear panels.
In all MVS panel options, the following LV equipment is standard and is mounted on the LV compartment door:
 Controller
 emergency stop pushbutton
 soft starter reset pushbutton
E3 panel

E3 panel schematic (for use with MV motor 2.3 kV~7.2 kV, 80 A ~ 600 A)
A1 Soft starter power assembly
Q1 Incoming isolator/earth switch
Q1 F1-3 R-rated line fuses
K1 Main contactor
F1-3 K2 Bypass contactor

K1

A1
K2

3
13513.A

E2 panel

E2 panel schematic (for use with MV motor 2.3 kV~7.2 kV, 80 A ~ 600 A)
A1 Soft starter power assembly
K1 Main contactor
K2 Bypass contactor

Short-circuit line protection is provided externally using R-rated fuses or an MV circuit breaker.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 45

SOFT STARTERS

Panel physical layout

1
6 1 Main isolator/earth switch (Q1)
2 R-rated protection fuses (F1-3)
3 Main contactor (K1)
2
4 Bypass contactor (K2)
3 7 5 Power assembly (A1)
4
6 Input terminals (L1, L2, L3)
7 Rear cable compartment
8
5 8 Output terminals (T11, T2, T3)

14078.B
Front view Side view

Control components mounted on the LV compartment door

1 3
1 Reset pushbutton
STAR T

STO P

RESET Ready Run Trip Local

2 Controller
INPU TA LCL

Emergency stop pushbutton

Star t Stop Reset RMT

3
INPU T B

Exit Menu
Store
13572.B

Logs Alt Tools

Front view of a typical MVS starter panel

Page 46 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

MVX panel option

Soft starters such as the MVX are rated for a maximum operating voltage (U) of 11 kV. The MVX is available as an
IP00 unit or an indoor-style metal enclosed switchgear panel with a rated voltage (Ur) of 12 kV and an arc-proof
classification of 31.5 kA for 1 second.
For operating currents (FLC) 160A, circuit breakers are required. For operating currents 160A, the switching
device can be either contactors or vacuum circuit breakers.
 The main switching device is a rack-in/out component housed in the main switching compartment.
 The bypass switching device is a fixed component housed in the cable compartment.
In all MVX panel options, the following LV equipment is standard and is mounted on the controller compartment
door:
 Controller
 emergency stop pushbutton
 soft starter reset pushbutton

MVX panel with contactors

3
1

Operating voltage 11 kV

F1-3
Operating current 160 A
K1 A1 Soft starter phase cassette
F1-3 Motor rated protection fuses
3 K1 Main contactor (withdrawable)
K2 Bypass contactor (fixed)
Q3 Earth switch
U1 U1 MV surge arrestors

A1 K2

Q3
13519.A

2
M

MVX panel with circuit breakers

3 Operating voltage 11 kV
1 Operating current >160 A
A1 Soft starter phase cassette
Q1 Q1 Main circuit breaker (withdrawable)
Q2 Bypass circuit breaker (fixed)
Q3 Earth switch
3 U1 MV surge arrestors

U1

A1 Q2

Q3
13520.A

2
M

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 47

SOFT STARTERS

MVX panel physical layout

Front view Side view Rear view

2 5

1 6
3
7

8
4

11081.C
9

1 Controller compartment 6 Bypass contactor/ circuit breaker (K2/Q2)

2 Upper LV compartment 7 Surge arrester (U1)
3 Main contactor/ circuit breaker compartment 8 Phase cassette power connections
(K1/Q1)
4 Phase cassette (A1) 9 Earth switch (Q3)
5 Input supply terminals (L1, L2, L3)

Control components mounted on the controller compartment door

1 Reset pushbutton
1 2
2 Emergency stop pushbutton
START
3 Controller
STOP
RESET
INPUT A
INPUT B

Rea dy R un Trip L oca l

Start Stop Reset

Exit Menu
3
Store

F1 Alt F2
Lo g s To o ls

Page 48 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Typical MVX panel line-up

1 Busbars isolated in separate compartment. 8 Arc-fault resistant enclosure

2 Internal separation compartments isolate bus 9 Lockable doors as standard
work during LV service
3 Interlocking racking system for VCBs etc 10 Two-step door locking prevents accidental access
4 AuCom keypad and analog/digital metering 11 Hinged door panels (no more lost or damaged
options available panels)
5 Safe LV compartment access without need to 12 Small footprint phase cassette
de-energise MV section
6 Easy to manoeuvre and install via lifting eye bolts 13 Viewing window to inspect switchgear status
without opening doors
7 Modular design allows for single panels or
line-ups

1 Overpressure flap
2 Bushing
3 Busbar system
4 Fixed contact insulator
5 Shutter
6 Current transformer
7 Earth switch
8 Enclosure
9 Low voltage compartment
10 Circuit breaker compartment
11 Vacuum circuit breaker
12 Door lock
13 Door handle
14 Inspection window
15 Cable compartment

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 49

SOFT STARTERS

Incoming and motor supply configuration

MV soft starter panels can be constructed for standalone use or with a horizontal busbar system for an MCC line-up.
If the soft starter panel will connect to a different switchgear style busbar system, a termination or transition panel will
be required. All panels can accommodate top or bottom exit for the outgoing motor cables.

Standalone MV soft starter panel

Incoming supply Front view
(top or bottom cable entry)

1
Q1
2
F1-3

3
K1 4

A1 5
K2

3
13513.A

13521.A
M
Motor cable (top or bottom exit)
Main isolator/earth switch
R-rated fuses
Main contactor
Bypass contactor
Power assembly
Typical MCC panel line-up

1 2 3 Existing switchgear panel

4 Transition panel
Soft starter MVS E3 panels
Mains supply busbar system
13522.A

M1 M2

Page 50 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Customer-specific requirements
Additional equipment can be designed and integrated into AuCom MVS and MVX panel solutions, depending on
the customer's specific needs.
In some cases, extra switchgear panels matching the soft starter panels may be required in order to house the extra
equipment.
 Motor protection relay (in addition to soft starter motor protection)
 RTD (PT100) temperature protection relay
 Insulation monitoring relay
 Predictive Maintenance Module (PMM)
 Metering relay
 PLCs, auto changeover contactors, PFC controllers etc
 Inverters and switch mode power supplies
 Low voltage control equipment (eg indicators, switches, pushbuttons)
 LV section panel light
 Panel anti-condensation heaters
 Motor heater circuit
 MV/LV control supply transformer
 Voltage transformer (1 or 3 phase)
 Extra CTs for protection or metering
 LV control transformer
 Power factor correction (requires dedicated panel to install capacitor banks and associated switchgear)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 51

SOFT STARTERS

AC53 Utilisation Codes

The IEC60947-4-2 standard for electronic starters defines AC53a and AC53b Utilisation Categories for detailing a
soft starter's current capability.

AC53a Utilisation Code

The AC53a Utilisation Code defines the current rating and standard operating conditions for a non-bypassed soft
starter.
The soft starter’s current rating determines the maximum motor size it can be used with. The soft starter's rating
depends on the number of starts per hour, the length and current level of the start, and the percentage of the
operating cycle that the soft starter will be running (passing current).
The soft starter’s current rating is only valid when used within the conditions specified in the utilisation code. The
soft starter may have a higher or lower current rating in different operating conditions.

351 A : AC-53a 3.5 - 15 : 50 - 6

Starts per hour
On-load duty cycle (%)
Start time (seconds)
Start current (multiple of motor full load current)
Starter current rating (amperes)

Starter current rating: The full load current rating of the soft starter given the parameters detailed in the remaining
sections of the utilisation code.
Start current: The maximum available start current.
Start time: The maximum allowable start time.
On-load duty cycle: The maximum percentage of each operating cycle that the soft starter can operate.
Starts per hour: The maximum allowable number of starts per hour.

4 Start current
2 5 6 Start time
350% On-load time
Current

Starts per hour

1
Run time
100%
09593.A

7 Off time
Nominal motor current
3
Time
Duty cycle = Start time + Run time
Start time + Run time + Off time

Page 52 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

AC53b Utilisation Code

The AC53b utilisation code defines the current rating and standard operating conditions for a bypassed soft starter
(internally bypassed, or installed with an external bypass contactor).
The soft starter’s current rating determines the maximum motor size it can be used with. The soft starter's rating
depends on the number of starts per hour and the length and current level of the start.
The soft starter’s current rating is only valid when used within the conditions specified in the utilisation code. The
soft starter may have a higher or lower current rating in different operating conditions.

80 A : AC-53b 3.5 - 15 : 345

Off time (seconds)
Start time (seconds)
Start current (multiple of motor full load current)
Starter current rating (amperes)

Starter current rating: The full load current rating of the soft starter given the parameters detailed in the remaining
sections of the utilisation code.
Start current: The maximum available start current.
Start time: The maximum allowable start time.
Off time: The minimum allowable time between the end of one start and the beginning of the next start.

2 3 Start current
350% Start time
Off time. This includes time while the
Current

starter is running but the SCRs are

1 bypassed (not conducting)
100% Nominal motor current
09594.A

Time

NOTE
AuCom MVS and MVX soft starters are AC53b rated and must always be used with a bypass contactor
or circuit breaker.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 53

SOFT STARTERS

3.6 Calculations
What is the minimum start current with a soft starter?
Soft starters can limit start current to any desired level. However, the minimum level of start current for a successful
start depends on the motor and load.
To start successfully, the motor must produce more acceleration torque than the load requires, throughout the start.
Reducing the start current also reduces the torque produced by the motor. The start current can only be lowered
to the point where the torque output remains just greater than the load torque requirement.
The likely start current can be estimated from experience, but more precise predictions require analysis of motor
and load speed/torque curves.

Successful soft start

1

Torque (% motor full load torque)

700
Full voltage start current
600 200
2 Current limit
500
Full voltage start torque
Current

400
3 Torque output at current limit
300 100
5 Acceleration torque
200 4
Load torque
100 6
09677.B

10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Speed (%full speed)

Unsuccessful soft start

700 1
Torque (% motor full load torque)

Full voltage start current

600 200
Current limit
500
2 Full voltage start torque
Current

400
3 5 Torque output at current limit
300 100
4 Acceleration torque
200
7 Load torque
100
09678.B

6
Stall
10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Speed (%full speed)

Calculating required start current for new or existing AC induction motor installations
A number of methods are available to estimate the level of start current a particular machine will require. These
methods range from generalisations producing approximations, through to advanced calculations which yield precise
predictions.

Typical Start Current Estimate

Where motor and load start characteristics are unknown and an estimate of typical start current is sufficiently
accurate, basic application information can allow experienced personnel to estimate the typical start current.
Required information:
 Motor size (kW / HP)
 Machine type and class (eg Compressor - Screw, Pump - Centrifugal)
 Machine starting condition (eg Conveyor - Unloaded Start)

Page 54 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Assessed Start Current Estimate

If information is available about the intended motor's locked rotor current (LRC) and locked rotor torque (LRT), the
motor's start performance can also be factored into the assessment. Even better estimates are obtained where
information on the machine start torque requirement are also known.
Required information:
 Motor size (kW / HP)
 Motor locked rotor current (LRC)
 Motor locked rotor torque (LRT)
 Machine starting torque (% FLT)

Calculation
Calculations use percentages of full load torque and full load current.
Minimum required start current

Where:
ISTR = minimum required start current (% motor FLC)
ISTR = LRC × TSTR LRC = Motor locked rotor current (% motor FLC)
LRT
TSTR = Minimum required start torque to accelerate machine from
standstill (% motor FLT)
LRT = Motor locked rotor torque (% motor FLT)

Example
A 1100 kW / 3.3 kV motor has a full load current of 235 A and a locked rotor current of 500% FLC. The motor
is required to start a pump with a minimum start current of 15% motor FLT. The motor's locked rotor torque is
150% FLT.
15% FLT
I STR = 500% FLC × 150%FLT

= 500 × 0.316
= 158% FLC
158
= ×235 A
100
= 371 A

Start Current and Torque Curve Analysis

To accurately calculate an application's start current requirements, torque and current curves for both the motor
and the load are required. Information from these curves is used to assess the minimum start current requirements.
With the following information, specific application software can accurately estimate the minimum required start
current (ISTR) and start time (tSTR):
 Motor datasheet (including kW, full load speed and motor shaft inertia)
 Motor speed/current curve
 Motor speed/torque curve
 Load speed/torque curve
 Load inertia

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 55

SOFT STARTERS

Motor, load and application data

Application Data:
Motor (kW) 3200
Full speed (rpm) 1481
Total load inertia at motor shaft (kg.m2) 168

Current and torque curve data:

Motor speed
as % of
rated speed
600 350

300

Torque (%FLT)
Current (%FLC)
(n%) ( Imn % ) ( Tmn % ) ( TIn % ) 500

0% 550 55 17.0 250

400
10% 548 54 8.0
20% 545 53 3.0 200
300
30% 541 53 5.0
150
40% 537 55 8.0
200
50% 531 58 10.0 100
60% 525 61 14.0
100 ( Imn % )
70% 518 67 19.0 50
( Tmn % )
80% 500 77 23.0 ( TIn % )
0 0
90% 475 110 30.0 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 95% 100%

13632.A
95% 425 160 34.0 Motor speed (%)
100% 100 100 37.0

Motor current & torque curves at 3.5 x FLC

Load
Motor speed accelerating 700 350
as % of torque at
rated speed speed n as
600 300
% motor FLT

Torque (%FLT)
500 250
Current (%FLC)

(n%) ( Imn % ) ( Tmn % ) ( TIn % ) ( Tan % )

0% 350 22 17.0 5
400 200
10% 350 22 8.0 14
20% 350 22 3.0 19
300 150
30% 350 22 5.0 17
40% 350 23 8.0 15
200 100
50% 350 25 10.0 15
60% 350 27 14.0 13
100 50 ( Imn % )
70% 350 31 19.0 12
( Tmn % )
80% 350 38 23.0 15 ( TIn % )
0 0
90% 350 60 30.0 30 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 95% 100%

13633.A
95% 350 109 34.0 75 Motor speed (%)
100% 100 100 37.0 0

Acceleration time calculations

1.5 x FLC 2.0 x FLC 2.5 x FLC 3.0 x FLC 3.5 x FLC
Motor Speed Average Load Acceleration Average Load Acceleration Average Load Acceleration Average Load Acceleration Average Load Acceleration
as % Rated Accelerating Time Over Accelerating Time Over Accelerating Time Over Accelerating Time Over Accelerating Time Over
Speed Torque Over Speed Range n Torque Over Speed Range n Torque Over Speed Range n Torque Over Speed Range n Torque Over Speed Range n
Speed Range n Speed Range n Speed Range n Speed Range n Speed Range n
(n%) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs)
0-10%-8.4 -1.50 -5.3 -2.40 -1.2 -10.53 3.8 3.35 9.7 1.31
10% - 20% -1.5 -8.59 1.7 7.58 5.7 2.22 10.6 1.19 16.4 0.77
20% - 30% 0.0 283.04 3.2 3.96 7.2 1.75 12.2 1.04 18.0 0.70
30% - 40% -2.3 -5.45 0.9 13.49 5.1 2.47 10.2 1.23 16.3 0.78
40% - 50% -4.5 -2.78 -1.1 -11.78 3.4 3.73 8.8 1.43 15.3 0.83
50% - 60% -7.2 -1.75 -3.5 -3.65 1.3 9.39 7.2 1.75 14.2 0.89
60% - 70% -11.2 -1.13 -7.1 -1.78 -1.8 -7.09 4.7 2.69 12.3 1.02
70% - 80% -14.7 -0.86 -9.8 -1.28 -3.6 -3.53 4.1 3.08 13.2 0.96
80% - 90% -17.6 -0.72 -10.6 -1.19 -1.6 -7.70 9.3 1.36 22.2 0.57
90% - 100% -11.8 -1.07 -1.9 -6.62 10.8 1.17 26.3 0.48 44.7 0.28
259 secs -4 secs -8 secs 18 secs 8 secs

4.0 x FLC 4.5 x FLC 5.0 x FLC 5.5 x FLC 6.0 X FLC
(n%) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs) (% FLT) (secs)
0-10%16.4 0.77 24.1 0.52 32.7 0.39 42.0 0.30 42.0 0.30
10% - 20% 23.2 0.55 30.8 0.41 39.3 0.32 48.0 0.26 48.0 0.26
20% - 30% 24.8 0.51 32.4 0.39 40.9 0.31 49.0 0.26 49.0 0.26
30% - 40% 23.2 0.54 31.1 0.41 40.0 0.32 47.5 0.27 47.5 0.27
40% - 50% 22.7 0.56 31.1 0.41 40.6 0.31 47.5 0.27 47.5 0.27
50% - 60% 22.2 0.57 31.2 0.40 41.4 0.31 47.5 0.27 47.5 0.27
60% - 70% 21.2 0.60 31.2 0.40 42.4 0.30 47.5 0.27 47.5 0.27
13634.A

70% - 80% 23.6 0.53 35.5 0.36 48.7 0.26 51.0 0.25 51.0 0.25
80% - 90% 37.1 0.34 54.0 0.23 67.0 0.19 67.0 0.19 67.0 0.19
90% - 100% 65.9 0.19 80.2 0.16 83.0 0.15 83.0 0.15 83.0 0.15
5 secs 4 secs 3 secs 2 secs 2 secs

Page 56 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Calculations performed by software

Revised motor torque (TSTR)

This calculates the torque that the motor will supply at a reduced level of start current.
Calculations use percentages of full load torque and full load current.

IM
2
I 
TSTR = TM × STR 
 IM  ISTR

TM
Where:
TSTR = revised motor torque TSTR
TM = motor torque level at full voltage start

13532.A
ISTR = motor start current limit level
IM = motor current level at full voltage start
Speed (%full speed)

Example
At 50% motor speed, calculate the revised motor torque for a start current limit of 400% FLC, a DOL current level
of 600% FLC and a DOL motor torque level of 120% FLT.
2
 400
TSTR = 120×  
 600
= 53% FLT

Acceleration time calculation

This calculates the time that the motor will take to accelerate from one speed to another specified speed (typically
calculated in 10% increments of motor full load speed).
The total acceleration time (from standstill to full load speed) is the sum of all incremental speed steps.
Calculations use actual values.
JT × n
t acel =
9.55 × Tav

Where:
tacel = time to accelerate from one speed to another (seconds)
JT = total inertia of the motor rotor and load, coupled together n1 n2
(kg·m2). To convert GD2 to kg·m2, divide by 4. Tav
n = speed difference from n1 to n2 (rpm)
13533.A

Tav = average acceleration torque from n1 to n2 (Nm).

Acceleration torque is the difference between the developed
motor torque and the required load torque as seen at the motor Speed (%full speed)
shaft

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 57

SOFT STARTERS

Example
Calculate the acceleration time of a 2000 kW motor driving a pump load from 40% to 50% full speed. The full
load speed is 2990 rpm. Average acceleration torque from 40% to 50% full speed is 20% motor FLT. The motor
shaft inertia is 60 kg·m2 and the pump inertia is 12 kg·m2.
Total inertia is motor plus load inertia:
JT = 60 + 12 kgm2
= 72 kgm2
Speed difference is 10% of full load speed:
n = n2 n1 × full load speed
= 50% 40% × 2990 rpm
= 299 rpm
Average acceleration torque is 20% of motor FLT.
kW × 9550
FLT =
n
2000 × 9550
=
2990
= 6388 Nm
20
Tav = 6388×
100
= 1278 Nm
Calculate the acceleration time from 40% to 50% full load speed:
JT × n
t acel =
9.55 × Tav
72kgm2 × 299 rpm
=
9.55 × 1278 Nm
21528
=
12205
= 1.76 sec

Page 58 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

3.7 Special Applications

Forward/Reverse motor starting
Forward and reverse operation is required for applications where it is necessary to change the mechanical direction
of the machinery as part of normal operation (eg conveyors, ball and hammer mills, shredders and cutting machines).
The electrical principle is very simple. The phase sequence (direction) of the mains supply is preselected using two
electrically interlocked switching devices connected in parallel. The output of one switching device is in phase with
the mains supply while the output of the other switching device is anti-phase with the mains supply. In medium
voltage installations, these switching devices are normally draw-out circuit breakers or fused contactors. Once the
mains supply phase sequence has been preselected, the motor is started and will run in either the forward or reverse
rotational direction (also referred to as positive or negative motor direction).
Commissioning of such applications is normally carried out with the motor initially uncoupled from the load. If motor
rotation during commissioning is opposite to what is expected, this is rectified by exchanging any two incoming
supply phases or any two output motor phases of the switchgear arrangement.

Typical AuCom medium voltage switchgear arrangement for a single forward-reverse motor starting system
(10 kV~13.8 kV) with MVX soft starter.
For clarity, current transformers and motor protection relays are not shown.

Q1 Q2 Q10

SST
L1
L2
L3 Q20
T1
T2
T3

Q3 Q30

13529.A

1
M1 3M

Mains supply Q10 Main circuit breaker (for SST)

Busbar system Q20 Bypass circuit breaker (for SST)
Q1 Forward direction circuit breaker Q30 Earth switch (motor side)
Q2 Reverse direction circuit breaker SST MV soft starter
Q3 Earth switch (supply side) M1 MV induction motor

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 59

SOFT STARTERS

Operating Sequence

NOTE
The phase sequence of the incoming mains supply and the motor winding connections must be
verified for correct motor rotation.

NOTE
The motor must be stopped before changing its operating direction. There is always a short time
delay built into the selected changeover of the phase rotation. This is typically less than 3 seconds
which is enough time to allow motor flux and thus any back EMF in the motor to decay. The soft
starter SST can use the coast-to-stop or soft stop method.

Forward control sequence

Before starting, both the supply side earth switch (Q3) and the motor side earth switch (Q30) must be open and
mains supply must be present.
1. The forward direction circuit breaker Q1 is closed. Electrical interlocking disables the reverse direction circuit
breaker Q2 from closing.
2. The soft starter is given a start command and the main circuit breaker Q10 closes.
3. The soft starter performs a series of prestart checks, then starts the motor in the forward direction.
4. Once the motor has reached full speed, the soft starter SST is bypassed using circuit breaker Q20.
Reverse control sequence
Before starting in reverse, both the supply side earth switch (Q3) and the motor side earth switch (Q30) must be
open and mains supply must be present.
1. The reverse direction circuit breaker Q2 is closed. Electrical interlocking disables the forward direction circuit
breaker Q1 from closing
2. The soft starter is given a start command and the main circuit breaker Q10 closes.
3. The soft starter performs a series of prestart checks, then starts the motor in the reverse direction
4. Once the motor has reached full speed, the soft starter SST is bypassed using circuit breaker Q20.

Page 60 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Multi-motor starting
This standard method of starting several medium voltage motors is often found in the water and mining industries.
Most multi-start control systems have 2 ~ 4 motors of the same kW size.
Each motor is started and stopped from the output of an electronic motor starter. The starter is usually a soft
starter (SST), providing the utility system has the capacity to supply the maximum required current, without any
significant disturbance. A guideline for maximum required current is [4+(n-1]) x motor FLC, where n = total number
of motors in the system. If supply capacity is limited, a variable frequency drive (VFD) may be used instead of a soft
starter.
Once a motor has reached full running speed, it is fed directly from an input bus. In this mode of operation, some
form of motor protection is required for each motor.
A master controller is required to control and supervise the entire multi-start system. This can be a PLC or an
integrated part of the starter.
There are typically two modes of operation.
 In Auto mode, the start and stop sequence can be preselected and the master controller handles the entire
switching procedure.
 In Manual mode, the starter is disabled and DOL control of each motor is provided by manual switching of
each motor bypass circuit breaker or contactor.
The entire system relies on critical time switching of circuit breakers or contactors, which are usually fixed switching
devices. Withdrawable switching devices are often used on the starter input and output to provide physical
isolation. This allows the starter's input and output to be isolated for servicing, in the event of a fault.

NOTE
The following example shows a typical configuration. There are many different control methods
available for multi-motor starting systems.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 61

SOFT STARTERS

Typical multi-start system with 3 motors

For clarity, current transformers and motor protection relays are not shown.

A2
1
A1
Q1

Q2 2

Q10A
M1
M
3

Q10B

Q20A
M2
M
3

Q20B

Q30A
M3
M
3

Q30B
13530.A

Input bus Q1 Main input circuit breaker (withdrawable)

Output bus Q2 Main output circuit breaker
(withdrawable)
M1 Motor 1 Q10A Motor 1 start circuit breaker (fixed)
M2 Motor 2 Q10B Motor 1 bypass circuit breaker (fixed)
M3 Motor 3 Q20A Motor 2 start circuit breaker (fixed)
A1 Electronic motor starter (SST or VFD) Q20B Motor 2 bypass circuit breaker (fixed)
A2 Master controller (PLC or part of A1) Q30A Motor 3 start circuit breaker (fixed)
Q30B Motor 3 bypass circuit breaker (fixed)

Page 62 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

Auto-mode operating sequence

NOTE
In this example, the master controller (A2) has been preselected to start the motors in order 1,2,3 then
stop them in the reverse order.

Starting control sequence

1. With the entire system enabled for Auto-mode operation, main input circuit breaker Q1 is closed.
2. The master controller (A2) issues a system start command. The main output circuit breaker Q2 closes.
3. Motor 1 start circuit breaker Q10A closes, then after a delay the starter A1 starts motor 1 and takes the motor
to full running speed.
 for a soft starter, full running speed is assumed when the motor's running current is equal to or less than
motor full load current
 for a VFD, full running speed is assumed when the output frequency has reached supply frequency
4. The master stops A1, motor 1 start circuit breaker Q10A is opened and after a delay, motor 1 bypass circuit
breaker Q10B is closed.
5. Motor 2 start circuit breaker Q20A closes, then after a delay A1 starts motor 2 and takes the motor to full
running speed.
6. The master stops A1, motor 2 start circuit breaker Q20A is opened and after a delay, motor 2 bypass circuit
breaker Q20B is closed
7. Motor 3 start circuit breaker Q30A closes, then after a delay A1 starts motor 3 and takes the motor to full
speed.
8. The master stops A1, motor 3 start circuit breaker Q30A is opened and after a delay, motor 3 bypass circuit
breaker Q30B is closed.
9. The main output circuit breaker Q2 is opened and the starting sequence is complete.
Stopping control sequence
1. The master controller A2 issues a system stop command. The main output circuit breaker Q2 closes.
2. Motor 3 bypass circuit breaker Q30B opens and after a delay, motor 3 start circuit breaker Q30A closes.
3. Starter A1 takes control of motor 3 and controls its stopping (stop duration is programmed in A1).
4. The master stops A1 and motor 3 start circuit breaker Q30A is opened.
5. Motor 2 bypass circuit breaker Q20B opens and after a delay, motor 2 start circuit breaker Q20A closes.
6. A1 takes control of motor 2 and controls its stopping.
7. The master stops A1 and motor 2 start circuit breaker Q20A is opened.
8. Motor 1 bypass circuit breaker Q10B opens and after a delay, motor 1 start circuit breaker Q10A closes.
9. A1 takes control of motor 1 and controls its stopping.
10. The master stops A1 and motor 1 start circuit breaker Q10A is opened.
11. The main output circuit breaker Q2 is opened and the stopping sequence is complete.
Manual mode operating sequence

NOTE
In this example, the electronic motor starter (A1) is not used to control any motor starting or stopping.

 The main input circuit breaker Q1 and main output circuit breaker Q2 remain open
 Each motor is manually started in any order. This is usually via a start pushbutton for each motor, which is
directly fed into an input of the master controller (A2).
 Each motor is started direct-on-line and fed from the main input bus via the motor's bypass circuit breaker
(Q10B, Q20B, Q30B). Motor protection is provided in this circuit, via a set of current transformers and a
dedicated motor protection relay for each motor.
 Each motor is manually stopped in any order. This is usually via a stop pushbutton for each motor, which
is directly fed into an input of the master controller A2. Only a motor freewheel stop is available.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 63

SOFT STARTERS

AuCom multi-motor starting solution

AuCom offers a proprietary solution that allows a single MVS or MVX soft starter to individually control up to 8
medium voltage motors. Each switchgear arrangement consists of a soft starter panel and a multi-start panel for
each motor. Depending on the system, a transition panel may be required and a main incomer panel is optional.
The entire system is controlled using a PLC mounted in the transition or incomer panel. The proprietary PLC logic
program provides the end user with flexible motor control options, selected via a touch-screen.

Typical arrangement of an MVS multi-start system for 2 motors.

Key features
 User interface touch screen
 Selectable control options for individual motors
 Selectable command source options for individual motors
 Motor protection for individual motors
 Robust safety interlocking system
 Comprehensive panel indication and bus mimicking

Page 64 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

User interface touch-screen

The screen provides the user with direct access to all control options.
PW_1 screen selects between contactor or circuit PW_2 screen selects between soft stop or coast to stop
breaker control of individual switchgear for individual motors

SOFT STOP
C B STOP
B = Breaker Line
C = Contactor Contactor

M-1 M-2 M-3 M-4

M-1 M-2 M-3 M-4
C B C B C B C B
OFF OFF OFF OFF
Motor
Contactor

M-5 M-6 M-7 M-8

C B C B C B C B
Motor
Bypass OFF OFF OFF OFF

13869.A
13870.A
MIMIC screens emulate switchgear, soft starter and M-1 to M-8 screens select the command source for
motor status motor starting and stopping, and select between DOL or
soft start for each motor (separate screen per motor)
From From From
MC3 MC2 MC1
Line M1_START/STOP ENABLE
6 kV

START
BP3 BP2 BP1 OFF OFF ENABLE

LOCAL REMOTE
Q3 Q2 Q1
STOP
OFF OFF ENABLE

SOFT
DOL START

M3 M3 M2 M2 M1 M1

13868.A
13867.A

FAULT FAULT FAULT

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 65

SOFT STARTERS

Slip ring motor control

The principle of a slip-ring motor is that external rotor resistance provides the necessary motor torque during
acceleration to full speed. Once the motor is close to full speed, the external rotor resistance is shorted out and the
motor operates as a standard three phase induction motor.
Old slip-ring motor systems typically consist of a liquid resistance tank with an electrode, or else a series of cast-iron
or wire wound resistor banks with a changeover switch. These systems require mechanical intervention for motor
starting, can become mechanically unreliable, and require regular maintenance.
AuCom medium voltage soft starters include a unique function specifically for slip-ring motor control. This function
is not suitable for applications where a slip-ring motor is being used for speed control or to develop excess start
torque (ie more than 100% motor full load torque to break away).
Some rotor resistance is required in order to start the motor. This rotor resistance (R1) is shorted when the motor
is close to full speed, using rotor resistance contactor K3. The contactor must be AC2 rated for the nameplate
rotor current.
AuCom medium voltage soft starters use a "Dual Ramp" start function. This provides a voltage ramp with constant
current control while the rotor resistance is in the circuit. This is followed by a smooth transition when shorting out
the rotor resistance. A second voltage ramp with constant current control is provided for acceleration to full
running speed.

Typical slip-ring motor starting system using a soft starter for control
SST
R1 M1 K1
T1 L1
M 1
3 T2 L2

T3 L3

K3 K2
13531.A

Mains supply R1 Rotor resistance (single stage)

K1 Main contactor SST Soft starter
K2 Bypass contactor M1 Slip ring (wound rotor) motor
K3 Rotor resistance contactor

Operating sequence

NOTE
The rotor resistance must be engineered to provide the necessary acceleration torque during motor
starting. This example assumes a soft starter which offers a dedicated slip-ring motor control function
(eg AuCom MVS or MVX).

Starting control sequence

1. The soft starter SST is given a start command and main contactor K1 closes.
2. The soft starter performs a series of prestart checks, then ramps up to full voltage using Ramp 1
3. Once the rotor has reached a constant speed, the voltage on the output of the soft starter SST is backed off and
rotor resistance contactor K3 closes, shorting out rotor resistance R1.
4. The output of the soft starter SST is ramped-up to full voltage using Ramp 2, accelerating the motor to full
speed.
5. Bypass contactor K2 closes and the starting sequence is complete.

Page 66 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SOFT STARTERS

AuCom slip-ring motor control sub-states

1
t1 t2 t3

V1

V2

03986.C
S1 S2 S3 S4

P1 P2 P3

1 Sub-states 3 States
t1 Main contactor close time S1 Ready
t2 Rotor resistance contactor close time S2 Pre-start tests
t3 Bypass contactor close time S3 Starting
2 Output voltage S4 Running
V1 100% voltage 4 Phases of operation
V2 Slip-ring retard voltage P1 Start command
P2 Rotor resistance current ramp
P3 Shorted rotor current ramp
Rotor resistance sizing
When using a soft starter for slip-ring motor starting, a single stage, three phase resistance bank must be used.
For an existing installation with a multi-stage resistance bank, the existing final stage resistance can normally be used.
To specify a new single-stage resistance bank, use the following guideline:
Slip-ring rotor resistance sizing formula:

Where:
Ur Rp = rotor resistance per phase ()
Rp = 0.2×
3×Ir Ur = open circuit rotor voltage (V)
P
Pp = 0.2× m
Ir = rotor current (A)
3 Pp = power rating of rotor resistance per phase (kW)
Pm = motor shaft power (kW)
Slip-ring synchronous motors
Although they are rare, there are some older synchronous motors which use a special double winding rotor. One
winding set is used for standard slip-ring rotor starting. The other winding set is a DC excitation winding used for
synchronous speed running.
These motors can be started using a soft starter with final stage resistance, but the control system must include a
synchronisation package. This package is supplied separately to the soft starter and must be integrated into the entire
system. This control method becomes complex and expensive and in most cases an upgrade will involve a complete
replacement of the synchronous motor for a standard squirrel cage induction motor.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 67

SOFT STARTERS

3.8 Common standards for MV soft starters and switchgear panels

MV soft starters and switchgear panels are commonly designed to meet the following international standards.

NOTE
This information is an overview of the most common conformance standards used in the medium
voltage industry. For specific equipment conformance, always refer to the technical data supplied by the
manufacturer.
Item Title Standard
Switchgear and apparatus High Voltage switchgear & control gear – Part 1: Common IEC62271-1
Specifications
High Voltage switchgear & control gear – Part 200: AC metal IEC62271-200
enclosed switchgear and control gear for rated voltages from
1 kV to 52 kV
High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 304: Design IEC62271-304
classes for indoor enclosed switchgear and controlgear for
rated voltages above 1 kV up to and including 52 kV to be used
in severe climatic conditions
AC metal enclosed switchgear (Chinese standard) GB3906 (2006)
AC Metal-enclosed Switchgear and Control Equipment for DL-T-404
rated voltage from 1 kV to 52 kV (Chinese standard)
General Technology Requirements of High-voltage DL-T-593
Switchgear and Control Equipment. (Chinese standard)
IEEE Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear IEEE C37.20.2
Internal arc resistance High Voltage switchgear & control gear – Part 200: AC metal IEC62271-200
enclosed switchgear and control gear for rated voltages from Annex A.6, criteria 1 to
1 kV to 52 kV 5
IEEE Guide for Testing Medium-Voltage Metal-Enclosed IEEE C37.20.7 (NEC)
Switchgear for Internal Arcing Faults
Insulation Insulation coordination – Part 1: Definitions, principles and IEC60071-1
rules
Insulation coordination – Part 1: Application guide IEC60071-2
Evaluation and qualification of electrical insulation systems IEC60505
Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage IEC60664-1
systems - Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests
Dry, solid insulating materials - Resistance test to high-voltage, IEC61621
low-current arc discharges
Degrees of protection Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP ratings & IEC60529
tests)
Classification of groups of Storage IEC60721-3-1
environmental
parameters and their
severities
Transportation IEC60721-3-2
IEC60068-2-32
Stationary use at weather protected locations IEC60721-3-3
Safety UL (2.3kV, 4.2kV and 13.8kV only) UL347B

Page 68 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

4 Switchgear
This section provides information and guidance on the design of metal-enclosed medium voltage switchgear panels
and associated switchgear apparatus. If further information is required, refer to the appropriate international
standards or contact your local AuCom representative.
AuCom offers MVS and MVX soft starters in their own unique panel styles. We also offer a range of
metal-enclosed switchgear panels rated up to 36 kV and 2500 A, covering all standard industrial configurations:
 Incomer feeder panel
 Direct incomer panel
 Bus coupler panel
 Bus riser panel
 Metering panel
 Direct-on-line motor starting panel
 Power factor correction panel
 Transition (termination) panel

Metal-enclosed, medium voltage switchgear panels and associated apparatus, rated from 1 kV to 52 kV, are covered
by IEC 62271-200 (this standard supersedes IEC 60298). Panel design and construction is determined by several
key operating factors and classifications:
 Rated voltage Ur (kV)
Determines the minimum insulation level requirements
 Rated current Ir (A)
 Rated frequency fr (Hz)
 Short circuit power SSC (MVA)
Determines elements of mechanical panel design and selection of integrated switchgear apparatus
 Accessibility to panel compartments
 Continuation of service with main compartment open
 Necessary isolation and segregation of live parts
 Level of internal arc withstand

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 69

SWITCHGEAR

4.1 Switchgear Classifications

There are many different types of enclosure designs for medium voltage switchgear use. However, the most
commonly accepted and used style is metal-enclosed, with segregated and insulated apparatus compartments.
AuCom's MVX soft starter range and medium voltage distribution range are available in this style of enclosure.

Panel compartments

4
1

1 Busbar compartment
2 Cable compartment
3 3 Switching compartment
4 Low voltage compartment

2
11158.A

Busbar Compartment
The busbar compartment houses the main busbar system, which is connected to the fixed upper isolating contacts
of the main switchgear apparatus by means of branch connections. The main busbars are made of high conductivity
copper. The busbar compartment of each panel is isolated from the busbar compartments of the neighbouring
compartments.
Single or double busbar configuration is used depending on the current rating.

Cable Compartment
The cable compartment houses some of the following components:
 Branch connections
 Earthing busbar
 Earth switch
 Power cables
 Surge arrestors
 Instrument transformers (current transformers, voltage transformers)
Switching Compartment
The switching compartment houses the bushing insulators containing fixed contacts for the connection of the
switching apparatus to the busbar and cable compartment. The bushings are single-pole type and are made of cast
resin. They are covered by metallic shutters.
The metallic shutters operate automatically during movement of the switching apparatus from the test position
(racked-out) to the service position (racked-in) and vice versa. Shutters may be locked if required.
The position of the switching apparatus can be seen from the front of the panel through an inspection window.

Low Voltage Compartment

The low voltage compartment provides safe isolation from any medium voltage equipment. This is used for
installation of low voltage control equipment, including DIN rail mounted terminal blocks. Equipment can be panel
mounted on the LV compartment door for customer interfacing.

Page 70 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

IEC Switchgear Classification

IEC 62271-200 classifies metal-enclosed switchgear based on:
 compartment types
 method of access to compartments
 safety levels provided during access
 effect on continuation of service during access
 type of insulation barriers between compartments
 internal arc endurance (refer to section on internal arc classification)
The manufacturer must state which areas of the switchgear are accessible and provide a clearly defined switchgear
classification.

Classification related to personnel safety in case of internal arc

Types of compartments with regard to accessibility Features
Operator-accessible Interlocked-based accessible No tools for opening – Interlocking
compartment compartment. allowing access only when HV parts are
Intended to be opened for normal dead and earthed.
operation and maintenance.
Procedure-based accessible No tools for opening – Provision for
compartment. locking to be combined with operator
Intended to be opened for normal procedures, to allow access only when HV
operation and maintenance. parts are dead and earthed.
Special accessible compartment Tool-based accessible compartment. Tools necessary for opening. No specific
Possible for user to open, but not provision to address access procedure.
intended to be for normal operation Special procedures may be required to
and maintenance. maintain performances.
Non-accessible compartment Not possible for user to open (not Opening destroys compartment or clear
intended to be opened). indication to the user. Accessibility not
relevant.
Switchgear classification with regard to the loss of service continuity Features
when opening accessible compartments
LSC1 Other functional units or some of them
shall be disconnected.
LSC2 LSC2A Other functional units can be energized.
LSC2B Other functional units and all cable
compartments can be energized.
Switchgear classification with regard to the nature of the barrier Features
between live parts and opened accessible compartment
PM Metallic shutters and partition between
live parts and open compartment –
(metal-enclosed condition maintained).
PI Insulation-covered discontinuity in the
metallic partitions/shutters between live
parts and open compartment.
Switchgear classification with regard to mechanical, electrical and fire Features
hazards in case of internal arc during normal operation
IAC No ejection of parts, no ignition of cloths,
enclosure remains earthed.
Source: IEC 62271-200

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 71

SWITCHGEAR

ANSI-defined switchgear
ANSI defined switchgear is equivalent to IEC classification LSC2B-PM, with the following characteristics:
 the main switching device is withdrawable, with disconnecting auxiliary control circuits
 separate compartments are provided for voltage transformers and control power transformers
 busbar compartments are divided between adjacent enclosures
 metal barriers isolate the withdrawable compartment, when the main switching device is drawn-out into
test position
 main circuit busbars and connections are covered with fire resistant insulating material
 mechanical interlocking prevents stored energy discharge of withdrawable parts
 a locking method prevents the withdrawable switching device from being moved into service position
 low voltage control parts are segregated from medium voltage apparatus
 all voltage transformers must have primary circuit current limiting fuses
Switchgear Ratings
Switchgear is rated according to IEC 62271-1. When choosing switchgear, its rating must be sufficient for the
electrical characteristics at the point of installation, the environmental conditions it needs to operate under, and the
safety requirements. Future expansion of the switchgear distribution system needs to be considered, as this may
affect initial rating requirements.
Switchgear selection is determined by considerations including:
Electrical conditions
 System operating voltage (U)
 System operating frequency (f)
 Nominal operating current (I)
 Short circuit current levels at point of installation (ISC, Idyn, etc)
 Horizontal busbar arrangement
Environmental conditions
 Ambient temperature
 Altitude
 Pollution degree
 Indoor or outdoor installation
Personnel safety considerations
 Internal Arc Classification (IAC)
 Interlocking of access areas and switchgear apparatus
 Access method (eg tools, keys, process, etc)
 Withdrawable switchgear apparatus
Switchgear information for enquiries or ordering
When enquiring about, or ordering switchgear, the supplier should at minimum provide the following information.
When enquiring, advise the supplier of any unusual operating condition requirements (eg altitude 1800 metres).
System characteristics
 nominal system voltage and frequency
 expected highest voltage
 type of neutral earthing system
Service conditions
 any non-standard service requirements which differ from normal routine
Installation specifics
 indoor or outdoor installation
 number of phases
 busbar arrangement details
 rated voltage (Ur)
 rated frequency (fr)

Page 72 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

 rated insulation level (Ud, Up)

 rated nominal current of main busbars and feeders (Ir)
 rated short-time withstand current (Ik)
 duration of short time withstand (tk)
 rated peak withstand current – typically 2.5 Ik at 50 Hz (Ip)
 protection degree for enclosure and apparatus
Operating device specifics
 types of operating devices
 rated auxiliary supply voltage (if any)
 rated auxiliary supply frequency (if any)
 rated gas pressure (if any)
 special interlocking requirements

Switchgear derating
Switchgear must be derated for altitudes exceeding 1000 metres and ambient temperatures exceeding 40 °C.
Insulation derating according to altitude
The relevant standards specify the derating required for equipment installed at an altitude greater than 1000 metres.

Guideline: derate by 1.25% U peak, per 100 metres above 1000 metres.

This applies for lightning impulse withstand voltage and for power frequency withstand voltage 50 Hz - 1 minute.
Derating for altitude only applies to air-insulated switchgear, not vacuum or SF6-insulated equipment.

Current derating
IEC 62271-1 defines the maximum permissible temperature rise for each device, material and dielectric medium,
using a reference ambient temperature of 40 °C.
The actual temperature rise is affected by:
 the rated current
 the ambient temperature
 the cubicle type and its protection index (IP rating)

Guideline: derate by 1% Ir per degree above 40 °C.

Current derating coefficient

1
Derating coefficient k

0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
13325.A

0.5
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Altitude (m)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 73

SWITCHGEAR

4.2 Standard Enclosure Configurations

Incomer Feeder Panel (IFP)
As the name implies, this panel configuration serves two purposes:
 As an incomer panel. This switches the incoming main supply onto the common horizontal busbar system
of a metal-enclosed switchgear arrangement
 As a feeder panel. This switches the main supply from the common horizontal busbar system of a
metal-enclosed switchgear arrangement onto a specific feeder circuit.
The enclosure will always have a main circuit breaker (normally withdrawable), housed in its own compartment of
the panel. An earth switch at the cable termination end of the circuit provides isolation during shutdown and
maintenance. Interlocking ensures that the earth switch cannot be closed until the main circuit breaker is open and
racked-out into the test position. Current transformers are fitted to interface with a protection relay for circuit
breaker trip operation.
Depending on the required function, voltage transformers can be supplied. These can be 3-phase or single phase,
either fixed or withdrawable style. A variety of low voltage equipment is used, which is mounted in its own
segregated compartment, situated at the top-front of the enclosure assembly.

AuCom provides an Incomer Feeder Panel as part of its L-Series switchgear range. This is rated at 12 kV
from 630 A to 2000 A. An IAC classification of 31.5 kA for 1 second is achieved by double skin
compartments, special locking door designs and top-exit arc flaps for pressure release.

Incomer Feeder Panel (IFP)

Typical Incomer Feeder Panel

11163.A

Front view Side view Rear view

1
1 Circuit breaker (withdrawable)
2 Current transformer set
3 Earth switch
2
4 Voltage transformer (fused and
withdrawable)

3 4
11165.A

Page 74 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Direct Incomer Panel (DIP)

A direct incomer panel connects the incoming main supply onto the common horizontal busbar system of a metal
enclosed switchgear arrangement, without any primary switching device.
An earth switch is typically provided at the cable termination end of the circuit for isolation during shutdown and
maintenance. Access to earth switch operation must be interlocked with the supply end switchgear so that the
earth switch cannot be closed onto a live circuit. Current and voltage transformers can be supplied as optional
items, along with a variety of low voltage equipment, which is mounted in its own segregated compartment situated
at the top-front of the enclosure assembly.

AuCom provides an Direct Incomer Panel as part of its L-Series switchgear range. This is rated at 12 kV
from 630 A to 2000 A. An IAC classification of 31.5 kA for 1 second is achieved by double skin
compartments, special locking door designs and top-exit arc flaps for pressure release.

Direct Incomer Panel (DIP)

Typical Direct Incomer Panel

11175.A
Front view Side view Rear view

1 Current transformer set

2 Earth switch
1 3 Voltage transformer (fused and
withdrawable)

2 3
11177.A

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 75

SWITCHGEAR

Bus Coupler Panel (BCP)

A bus coupler panel connects two adjacent horizontal busbar systems together using a main circuit breaker
(normally a withdrawable type), which is housed in its own compartment of the panel. The horizontal busbar
system of metal-enclosed switchgear is usually situated towards the top of the panel enclosure. In order to
physically connect two adjacent busbar systems together, a bus coupler panel must be used alongside a bus riser
panel.
A main earth switch, current and voltage transformers and low voltage equipment can all be supplied as optional
extras.

AuCom provides a Bus Coupler Panel as part of its L-Series switchgear range. This is rated at 12 kV from
630 A to 2000 A. An IAC classification of 31.5 kA for 1 second is achieved by double skin
compartments, special locking door designs and top-exit arc flaps for pressure release.

Bus Coupler Panel (BCP)

Typical Bus Coupler Panel

11166.A
Front view Side view Rear view

1
1 Circuit breaker
2 Current transformer set
2 3 Earth switch

3
11169.A

Page 76 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Bus Riser Panel (BRP)

A bus riser panel contains a vertical 3-phase bus which connects the output of a bus coupler panel at the bottom of
the enclosure, to a horizontal busbar system at the top of the enclosure. In order to physically connect two adjacent
horizontal busbar systems together, a bus riser panel must be used alongside a bus coupler panel.
Voltage transformers, along with low voltage equipment, can be supplied as optional extras.

AuCom provides a Bus Riser Panel as part of its L-Series switchgear range. This is rated at 12 kV from
630 A to 2000 A. An IAC classification of 31.5 kA for 1 second is achieved by double skin
compartments, special locking door designs and top-exit arc flaps for pressure release.

Bus Riser Panel (BRP)

Typical Bus Riser Panel

11170.A
Front view Side view Rear view

1 Voltage transformer (fused and

withdrawable)

1
11172.A

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 77

SWITCHGEAR

Metering Panel (MTP)

A metering panel contains a primary horizontal busbar system with a bus tap-off that drops vertically to the bottom
of the enclosure. The vertical bus is connected to voltage transformers, which can be of the fixed or withdrawable
type. Sometimes a main earth switch is supplied. Metering equipment is often contained within the segregated
low voltage compartment, located at the top-front of the enclosure.

AuCom provides a Metering Panel as part of its L-Series switchgear range. This is rated at 12 kV from
630 A to 2000 A. An IAC classification of 31.5 kA for 1 second is achieved by double skin
compartments, special locking door designs and top-exit arc flaps for pressure release.

Metering Panel (MTP)

Typical Metering Panel

11173.A
Front view Side view Rear view

1 Earth switch
2 Voltage transformer (fused and
withdrawable)

1 2
11174.A

Page 78 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Busbar Systems
Overview
Medium voltage busbar systems consist of two general arrangements. The main switchgear distribution bus has
three busbar sets (one set per phase) which run horizontally through all the panels in a line-up. These distribution
busbars run through a dedicated chamber within each metal-enclosed panel. Segregation of busbar chambers,
between adjacent panels, is provided by using insulated through-bushings. Inside the horizontal busbar chamber of
each panel, a vertical feeder busbar system can be tapped off the main horizontal system, for incomer, feeder,
bus-coupler, bus-riser, metering or motor starter circuit.

11185.A
Ratings
The nominal current rating (Ir) of an incomer busbar system usually matches the rating of the main busbar system it
is feeding. Likewise, bus-coupler and bus-riser systems have the same current rating as the main busbar system they
are connecting. A feeder circuit busbar system has a nominal current rating to match the expected load.

The nominal current rating is determined by the cross sectional area, shape and configuration of the
individual phase bars.

The short-time withstand current rating (Ik) of the busbar system must be greater than the highest expected
symmetrical fault current at the point of installation. This rating is for a short-time withstand period of 1 or 3
seconds (tk). All busbar systems installed in the same switchgear line-up usually have the same short-time withstand
current/time rating.
The nominal voltage rating (Ur) of a busbar system must be greater than the installation's operating voltage. This
voltage rating determines the minimum phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth busbar clearances.
The nominal frequency rating (fr) of a busbar system must match the installation's operating frequency.

NOTE
The nominal current must be derated for high ambient temperatures (usually above 40 °C).
The nominal voltage and insulation ratings of a busbar system must be adjusted for altitudes over 1000
metres.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 79

SWITCHGEAR

Design
Busbar system design must consider:
 adequate minimum required clearance between phases and phase to earth
 selection of adequate busbar insulator standoffs
 bolting arrangements for continuous busbar connections
 thermal effects on busbar and insulator standoffs under normal and fault conditions
 electrodynamic forces applied to busbars and insulator standoffs under fault conditions
 avoidance of mechanical resonance under normal operating and fault conditions
Voltage ratings and clearance
IEC 62271-1 gives typical voltage ratings for busbar systems and insulator standoffs.

Typical voltage ratings and minimum clearances for busbar systems and insulator standoffs
Rated voltage Power frequency withstand Lightning impulse withstand Clearance –
voltage voltage recommended
Ur (kV) Ud (kV) Up (kV) P-P and P-E (mm)
7.2 20 60 70~90
12 28 75 120
17.5 38 95 160
24 50 125 220
36 70 170 320
Source: derived from IEC 62271-1
Current ratings and dimensions
The nominal current rating of a busbar is determined by the type of material, shape and cross sectional area of the
bar and the maximum permissible temperature rise of the material. If the busbar is carrying AC current, the
operating frequency has a slight effect on the busbar rating due to magnetic skin effect.
A busbar system has a short-time withstand current rating. The temperature rise in the event of a short circuit
condition must not exceed the thermal limits of busbar standoffs.

Typical current ratings and nominal dimensions for medium voltage busbar systems

NOTE
Dimensions should be used as a guideline only and may vary.
The dimensions stated in this table are based on bare copper at ambient temperature of 40 °C,
maximum permissible temperature rise of 50 °C, operating at 50 Hz.
Rated current Bar dimensions - Rated short-time withstand Rated short-time withstand
per phase current 1 period 1
(A) W x D (mm) Ik (kA) tk (seconds)
630 50 x 6
1250 80 x 10
1600 100 x 10 12.5/16/20/25/31.5/40/50 0.5/1/2/3
2000 100 x 6 (2 bars)
2500 100 x 10 (2 bars)
3150 100 x 3 (3 bars)
Source: current rating information is derived from IEC 62271-1
1
Most medium voltage switchgear including busbar systems have short-time withstand ratings of 16 kA, 20 kA,
25 kA or 31.5 kA for 3 seconds.

Page 80 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Temperature rise
During short circuit conditions the busbar will rise in temperature, depending on the level of short circuit current and
time duration. This temperature rise must not exceed the thermal limits of any equipment in contact with the
busbar.

Maximum permissible temperature rise for bolt-connected devices, including busbars

Material and dielectric medium Maximum permissible Temperature rise
temperature (°C) above 40 °C ambient
(°C)
Bolted connection (or equivalent)
Bare copper, bare copper alloy or bare aluminium alloy
In air 90 50
In sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) 115 75
In oil 100 60
Silver or nickel coated
In air 115 75
In sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) 115 75
In oil 100 60
Tin-coated
In air 105 65
In sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) 105 65
In oil 100 60
Source: derived from IEC 62271-1

NOTE
When engaging parts with different coatings, or where one part is of bare material, the permissible
temperature and temperature rise shall be those of the surface material having the lowest permitted
value.

Electrodynamic withstand
During short circuit conditions, the peak current associated with the first loop of the fault current produces
electrodynamic forces which stress the busbar and insulator standoff supports. Stress on the busbars must not
exceed the limits of the material used. Bending forces must not exceed the mechanical limits of the insulator
standoffs.

Electrodynamic forces
Busbars (parallel) Support
Ip Ip F1
h = e2
F

F1 H
F1 l
13873.A

d
13678.A

d Distance between phases (cm) H Insulator height

l Distance between insulators on a single phase h Distance from head of insulator to busbar
(cm) centre of gravity
F1 Force on busbar centre of gravity (daN) F Force on head of insulator stand-off (daN)
Ip Peak value of short circuit current (kA)
NOTE: 1 daN (dekanewton) is equal to 10 newtons.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 81

SWITCHGEAR

Resonant frequency
The busbar system must be checked for potential resonance under normal operating conditions and fault conditions.
This is done by calculating the natural resonant frequency of the system, which must meet the following criteria:
 50 Hz supply: not within the ranges 48 Hz to 52 Hz and 96 Hz to 104 Hz
 60 Hz supply: not within the ranges 58 Hz to 62 Hz and 116 Hz to 124 Hz
Calculation requirements
Busbar systems are subjected to thermal and electrodynamic stresses under normal operating conditions, but more
so under short circuit fault conditions. It is important to ensure the busbar system will function safely under all
known conditions. When checking the design, the most important considerations are the nominal operating
current, expected fault current at the point of installation, average ambient temperature and the altitude of the
installation.
To check the safety of a busbar system:
 Check that the current rating of the busbar system (Ir) exceeds the expected nominal current. Main
factors affecting the busbar rating are busbar material and configuration, ambient temperature and
maximum permissible temperature rise.
 Check the maximum expected temperature rise of the busbar during a short circuit fault. In the event of
short circuit current flow (Ith), the surface temperature of a busbar must not exceed the thermal limits of
any material coming in contact with it (ie insulator standoffs).
 Check the maximum expected electrodynamic forces imparted on the busbars and insulator standoffs, due
to the peak short circuit fault current (Idyn). Do not exceed the mechanical limitations of the material.
 Check that the busbar system will not resonate under normal operating and fault conditions.
Refer to Busbar Calculations on page 149 for calculation details and examples.

Busbar bolting arrangements

Typical busbar bolting details for single overlap copper bar

Bar width Joint Joint area Number of Metric bolt size Bolt Hole size Washer Washer
(mm) overlap (mm2) bolts1 (coarse thread) torque (mm) diameter thickness
(mm) (Nm) (mm) (mm)
16 32 512 2 M6 7.27 14 1.8
20 40 800 2 M6 7.27 14 1.8
25 60 1500 2 M8 1710 21 2
30 60 1800 2 M8 1710 21 2
40 70 2800 2 M10 28
11.5 24 2.2
50 70 3500 2 M12 4514 28 2.7
60 60 3600 4 M10 28
11.5 24 2.2
80 80 6400 4 M12 4514 28 2.7
100 100 10000 5 M12 4515 28 2.7
120 120 14400 5 M12 4515 28 2.7
160 160 25600 6 M16 9120 28 2.7
200 200 40000 8 M16 9120 28 2.7
Source: Copper for Busbars http://www.copperinfo.co.uk/busbars/pub22-copper-for-busbars/homepage.shtml
1
Number of bolts based on using high-tensile steel or bronze (CW307G, formerly C104)

Page 82 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

4.3 Safety Considerations

Switchgear interlocking systems
Interlocking between different switchgear apparatus and enclosure access covers and doors enhances personnel
safety, as well as improving operational convenience. If a switching device can cause serious damage in an incorrect
position, this must also have a locking facility.
Interlocking uses electrical and mechanical methods or a combination of both.
IEC 62271-200 states mandatory rules for switchgear interlocking:
For metal-enclosed switchgear with removable switching apparatus:
 the switching device must be in the open position before it can be withdrawn
 the switching device can only be operated in the positive service or test position
 the switching device cannot be closed unless the auxiliary control circuits required to open the switch are
connected. Auxiliary control circuits cannot be disconnected with the switching device closed in the
service position
For metal-enclosed switchgear with disconnectors:
 a disconnector cannot be operated under conditions other than those for which it is intended to be used
 a disconnector cannot be operated unless the main switching device is open
 operation of a main switching device is prevented unless its associated disconnector is in a positive service,
test or earth position
 disconnectors providing isolation for maintenance and servicing must have a locking facility
Methods
The illustration shows a common switchgear arrangement for a medium voltage power distribution system. This
switchgear arrangement uses three separate interlocking methods.

Typical MV power distribution switchgear arrangement with interlocks

A Incomer panel
TXR_L TXR_R
B Left bus
C Right bus
D Feeder panel
Interlock scheme 1 (typical)
Interlock scheme 2 (typical)
A A
Interlock scheme 3 (typical)
E-IL E-IR
Q-IL Circuit breaker - left incomer
E-IL Earth switch - left incomer
2 2
TXR_L Supply transformer - left bus
Q-IL 1 Q-IR
Q-IR Circuit breaker - right incomer
E-IR Earth switch - right incomer
(LOCK) (LOCK) TXR_R Supply transformer - right bus
(KEY) (KEY) Q-BC Circuit breaker - bus coupler
Q-BC
B C Q-FL Circuit breaker - left feeder
E-FL Earth switch - left feeder
(LOCK)
Q-FR Circuit breaker - right feeder
Q-FL 3 Q-FR 3 E-FR Earth switch - right feeder

E_FL E_FR
13679.A

D D

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 83

SWITCHGEAR

Interlock scheme 1: Two incomers and bus coupler interlocking

The two incomers and the bus coupler circuit breakers use a standard "2 out of 3" interlocking system to prevent a
parallel feed from the two incomers onto a common bus. Interlocking allows the following conditions:
1. The two incomer circuit breakers closed (Q-1L and Q-1R ) with the bus coupler circuit breaker open (Q-BC).
2. Left incomer and bus coupler circuit breakers closed (Q-IL and Q-BC) with right incomer circuit breaker open
(Q-IR).
3. Right incomer and bus coupler circuit breakers closed (Q-IR and Q-BC) with left incomer circuit breaker open
(Q-IL).
Typically, these interlocking conditions are met using both a mechanical and electrical method.
Mechanical interlocking
Interlocking uses a key system which includes 3 identical locks and 2 identical keys.
Both incomer and the bus coupler circuit breakers (Q-IL, Q-IR, Q-BC) require an interlock key to be inserted into
the circuit breaker body, and the circuit breaker racked into the service position, before the circuit breaker can be
closed. This interlock key can only be removed when the circuit breaker is open and in the racked-out test position.
When the circuit breaker is in service, the interlock key is not accessible.
Both incomer and the bus coupler circuit breakers (Q-IL, Q-IR, Q-BC) are fitted with identical locks but only two
matching keys are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the two incomer circuit breakers are closed using the two available interlock
keys. The bus coupler circuit breaker is not permitted to close. If one of the incomer supplies is lost, the associated
circuit breaker is opened and racked-out to the test position. The interlock key can be moved to the bus coupler
circuit breaker, allowing it to be racked into the service position and closed. When normal supply resumes, the bus
coupler circuit breaker has to be opened before the revived incomer circuit breaker can be closed using the interlock
key retrieved from the bus coupler circuit breaker.
This key interlock system only allows for any two circuit breakers to be closed at the same time.
Electrical interlocking
Normally closed auxiliary contacts from the two incomers and the bus coupler circuit breakers are used to
electrically interlock the close command of each circuit breaker.
 Left incomer circuit breaker (Q-IL) has a normally closed auxiliary contact from the right incomer circuit
breaker (Q-IR) and a normally closed contact from the bus coupler circuit breaker (Q-BC) connected in
parallel to allow a close command.
 Right incomer circuit breaker (Q-IR) has a normally closed auxiliary contact from the left incomer circuit
breaker (Q-IL) and a normally closed contact from the bus coupler circuit breaker (Q-BC) connected in
parallel to allow a close command.
 Bus coupler circuit breaker (Q-BC) has a normally closed auxiliary contact from the left incomer circuit
breaker (Q-IL) and a normally closed contact from the right incomer circuit breaker (Q-IR) connected in
parallel to allow a close command.
This control method only allows for any two circuit breakers to be closed at the same time.
Interlock scheme 2: Incomer circuit breaker and earth switch interlocking
The incomer circuit breaker (Q-IL or Q-IR) and earth switch (E-IL or E-IR) are mechanically interlocked to prevent
both being closed at the same time. The earth switch can only be closed once the circuit breaker is open and
racked-out to the test position. The circuit breaker can only be racked-in for closing, once the earth switch is open.
An additional level of interlocking is required. The incomer earth switch cannot be mechanically operated until
power is removed from the incoming supply. This prevents closing the earth switch onto a live supply. This
interlocking is achieved in one of two ways:
1. Mechanically by using key access. The incomer earth switch (E-IL or E-IR) handle operation is only accessible
by using a key, retrieved from the upstream circuit breaker when it is open and racked-out.
2. Electrically by using a solenoid. A solenoid is energised when the upstream circuit breaker is open and racked
out, allowing access to the incomer earth switch (E-IL or E-IR) handle operation.
Interlock scheme 3: Feeder circuit breaker and earth switch interlocking
The feeder circuit breaker (Q-FL or Q-FR) and earth switch (E-FL or E-FR) are mechanically interlocked to prevent
both being closed at the same time. The earth switch can only be closed once the circuit breaker is open and
racked-out to the test position. The circuit breaker can only be racked-in for closing, once the earth switch is open.

Page 84 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Internal arc classification

Metal enclosed switchgear can suffer internal faults at numerous locations, causing a wide range of physical damage.
Internal Arc Classification (IAC) of metal enclosed switchgear considers the damage that can affect covers, doors,
inspection windows, ventilation openings etc, as a result of overpressure within panel compartments. IAC also
takes into consideration damage from thermal effects, ejected hot gases and molten particles.
When selecting metal enclosed switchgear, the probability of internal arcing and the safety risk to operators and the
general public needs to be considered. Where the safety risk is considered relevant, the switchgear should be IAC
classified. The IAC classification indicates the maximum fault current level and duration to which the switchgear has
been tested. When choosing switchgear, the IAC rating should exceed the expected fault current level and
duration at the point of installation.
The rating also takes into account the accessibility of the switchgear. IAC tested and certified switchgear must
always be clearly marked with the classification, fault level and duration, and accessibility of each side.

Relevant standards and testing

The primary standard for internal arc classification of medium voltage metal enclosed switchgear is IEC 62271-200;
IEC 62271-202 is also relevant.
IEC 62271-200 details test procedures to assess damage to switchgear from internal arcing. Test results provide the
switchgear with an IAC classification. Switchgear which passes indoor testing is also considered suitable for outdoor
use with the same accessibility requirements.
Accessibility is divided into two categories, Type A is for authorised personnel dressed with adequate protective
equipment and Type B for general public access. Equipment is also tested for different directions of access: front,
rear or lateral (side).
Cotton cloth indicator panels are placed 2 m above ground level and on each accessible side of the equipment
under test. If pressure relief ducts are part of the switchgear design, these must also be subjected to cloth indicator
panel testing.
Tests are carried out by supplying a predetermined level of fault current for a specific duration. Using various test
procedures, the applied fault current creates an internal arc to ground within a specific region of the switchgear. In
general, test results are considered acceptable if:
 correctly secured doors and covers do not open - deformation is acceptable, providing it doesn't protrude
as far as the indicator panels
 no fragmentation of the enclosure occurs within the test time - small particles up to 60 g are acceptable
 arcing does not cause any holes in the accessible areas, up to a height of 2 metres
 indicator panels do not ignite due to hot gas emissions
 the enclosure remains connected to its earth point (verified by a continuity test)

IAC certification example

Indoor room testing 1175
The room is simulated by a floor, ceiling and
two walls perpendicular to each other.
100
Accessibility
Type A: restricted to authorised personnel
Type B: unrestricted accessibility
F = front access
1230
L = lateral (side) access
R = rear access

IAC certification example

IAC classification: AF
Internal Arc: 31.5 kA, 1 s

100 300

13707.A

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 85

SWITCHGEAR

Causes of internal arc

There are many potential causes for internal arcing within metal enclosed switchgear. Some of the more common
causes are:
 foreign matter in the enclosure (eg vermin, metal swarf, tools)
 contamination and general degradation of insulation material
 inadequate insulation of cable terminations
 overheating of termination points due to inadequate preparation and tightening
 system overvoltage
 incorrect protection settings and coordination

Locations, causes and examples of measures to decrease the probability of internal faults
Locations where internal Possible causes of internal Examples of possible preventive measures
faults are most likely to faults
occur
Cable compartments Inadequate design Selection of adequate dimensions.
Use of appropriate materials.
Faulty installation Avoidance of crossed cables connections.
Checking of workmanship on site. Correct torque
Failure of solid or liquid insulation Checking of workmanship and/or dielectric test
(defective or missing) on site.
Regular checking of liquid levels, where applicable
Disconnectors Maloperation Interlocks. Delayed reopening.
Switches Independent manual operation. Making capacity
Earthing switches for switches and earthing switches. Instructions to
personnel.
Bolted connections and Corrosion Use of corrosion inhibiting coating and/or greases.
contacts Use of plating. Encapsulation, where possible.
Faulty assembly Checking of workmanship by suitable means.
Correct torque. Adequate locking means.
Instrument transformers Ferro-resonance Avoidance of these electrical influences by
suitable design of the circuit.
Short circuit on LV side for VTs Avoid short circuit by proper means for example,
protection cover, LV fuses.
Circuit breakers Insufficient maintenance Regular programmed maintenance.
Instructions to personnel.
All locations Error by personnel Limitation of access by compartmentation.
Insulation embedded live parts. Instructions to
personnel.
Ageing under electric stresses Partial discharge routine tests.
Pollution, moisture, ingress of dust, Measures to ensure that the specified service
vermin, etc conditions are achieved. Use of gasfilled
compartments.
Overvoltages Surge protection. Adequate insulation
co-ordination.
Dielectric tests on site.
Source: IEC 62271-200

Page 86 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Minimising the effects

Certain design techniques are used to provide a high level of safety to personnel, by minimising the effects of internal
arcing:
 compartmenting of enclosure
 pressure relief methods
 double skin panels
 arc venting away from access areas
 remote control of switchgear
 rapid fault clearance
Rapid fault clearance requires fast detection and isolation of the arc. This can be achieved using:
 light, heat or pressure sensors combined with a relay to trip a fast acting circuit breaker
 pressure operated earth switch capable of diverting the internal arc to ground (arc eliminator)
 fast acting, current limiting line supply fuses

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 87

SWITCHGEAR

4.4 Switchgear Apparatus

Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a main switching device, providing control and protection of an electrical
circuit. It is a very fast acting device, capable of switching high fault current levels. Some
medium voltage circuit breakers have integrated current monitoring and protection facilities, but
in most cases external current transformers and a protection relay are required to trip the circuit
breaker under abnormal conditions.
13680.A

A circuit breaker must operate under various conditions without damage or safety risk to personnel:
 a circuit breaker operates mostly in the closed position and must continuously sustain its rated current
without exceeding its thermal limits
 in the closed position, a circuit breaker must sustain a specific fault current level (Ik) for a short time period
(tk). A circuit breaker's short-time withstand fault current rating must exceed the expected rms
symmetrical fault current level (Is) at the point of installation
 a circuit breaker must be capable of sustaining electrodynamic and thermal stresses associated with the
peak let-through energy of a fault. The circuit breaker's make rating must exceed the expected peak fault
current level (Ip) at the point of installation.

Where:
Ip = 2.5 x Is (for a 50 Hz supply with a
Ip = asymmetrical peak let-through fault current, from the first fault
45 ms DC time constant)
loop (kA)
Ip = 2.6 x Is (for a 60 Hz supply with a
Is = rms symmetrical fault current level, with no DC component
45 ms DC time constant)
(kA)

Ip Ia asymmetrical rms current

Ia
IDC DC component
Is symmetrical rms component
IDC Ip instantaneous peak current
Current

Is
13716.A

Time

Construction
Main switching contact design has two primary components:
 a suitable insulation medium to minimise the physical size of the apparatus
 a method to reduce any arc and extinguish it during contact breaking
Modern medium voltage circuit breakers tend to be either vacuum or SF6 gas-insulated (sulphur hexafluouride).
Oil filled circuit breakers are less common.

Page 88 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Vacuum circuit breakers

Typical characteristics
Environment: Indoor
Operating current: ≤ 3000 A
Operating voltage: ≤ 36 kV
Fault current rating: ≤ 31.5 kA
Contacts: One fixed and one moveable
copper/chromium switching contact per pole, with a
contact separation distance of 10-15 mm. Contacts
reside in a vacuum, within a totally sealed cast resin
enclosure.
Arc-extinguishing properties: good

SF6 gas-insulated circuit breakers

Typical characteristics
Environment: Indoor/outdoor
Operating current: ≤ 4000 A
Operating voltage: ≤ 52 kV
Fault current rating: ≤ 50 kA
Contacts: One fixed and one moveable
copper/chromium switching contact per pole, with a
contact separation distance of 10-15 mm.
Arc-extinguishing properties: quick and efficient.
Special design techniques use compressed sulphur
hexafluoride gas to extinguish the arc.

Oil circuit breakers

These circuit breakers use an oil blast method to extinguish the arc. When the switching contacts separate, the arc
vaporises the oil surrounding it. This produces a gas which inhibits arc ionisation. At the same time, convectional
movement of the oil aids in cooling after the arc has been extinguished.
Due to oil fire hazard, these circuit breakers are generally used for outdoor applications only, and are being replaced
in indoor applications.

Mechanical operation
Circuit breakers are electromechanically driven using magnetic or stored energy techniques.
 magnetic technique: uses an open and close armature, permanently energised in one of the two states.
The energy required to maintain constant magnetic field strength, in either the open or closed state, is
stored using capacitance. Energised armatures interact with mechanical linkages to operate the main
switching contacts. This operating technique provides extremely fast operation and is very energy
efficient.
 stored energy technique: incorporates an opening and closing spring. Each spring is charged with potential
energy, by motor operation, or by using a manually operated handle in case of auxiliary power loss.
Mechanical operation of the main switching contacts occurs by releasing the potential energy from a
charged spring. Spring release is activated electrically by the use of small opening and closing solenoids or
by manual pushbuttons which operate mechanical latches.
Withdrawable circuit breakers
Most indoor switchgear installations use withdrawable circuit breakers. These are also referred to as rack style or
draw-out units (DOU).
The main circuit breaker body is fitted on a trolley arrangement known as a truck, which is moved horizontally by
means of a crank handle. By moving the circuit breaker towards the operator, the main contact points separate until
a test position is reached. To reconnect the main contact points, the circuit breaker is moved away from the
operator until the service position is reached. The circuit breaker position cannot be changed unless the circuit
breaker main poles are electrically open.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 89

SWITCHGEAR

When a withdrawable circuit breaker is integrated into a metal-enclosed switchgear compartment,

electromechanical interlocking is used to ensure safe operation, such as:
 the circuit breaker switchgear compartment door cannot be opened unless the circuit breaker is electrically
open and physically racked out to the test position
 isolation barrier shutters are automatically operated, according to the circuit breaker truck position
 when an earth switch is incorporated into a metal-enclosed switchgear panel with a withdrawable circuit
breaker, the earth switch can only be closed if the circuit breaker is electrically open and physically racked
out to the test position

The main advantage of a withdrawable circuit breaker compared with fixed type circuit breakers is the ability to
safely disconnect and isolate the main circuit for maintenance or circuit breaker replacement.

11163.A
Control methods

Compatibility between circuit breaker types and control methods

Circuit breaker type Electrical control method Manual control
Single command operated (SCO) Double command operated (DCO) Pushbuttons mounted on circuit
control signal control signal breaker
Withdrawable, magnetically
operated
Withdrawable, stored
energy operated
Fixed, magnetically X
operated
Fixed, stored energy X
operated
SCO control uses a single contact. This contact is maintained open to trip the circuit breaker and maintained closed
to close the circuit breaker.
DCO control uses two momentary, normally open contacts. One contact is pulsed closed to trip the circuit
breaker. The other contact is pulsed closed to close the circuit breaker.

IEC Ratings
Medium voltage circuit breakers must be type tested to provide standard ratings. The most commonly used
standards for this testing are IEC 62271-1 and IEC 62271-100.
The following information provides details of some of the more common ratings which must be marked on the
circuit breaker nameplate after type testing.

Page 90 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Rated voltage, Ur (kV)

Maximum operating voltage (rms) the device can continuously withstand during normal operation. The rated
voltage must be greater than or equal to the system's operating voltage.
Standard values for Ur : 3.6, 7.2, 12, 17.5, 24, 36 kV (source: IEC 62271-1)

Rated lightning impulse withstand rating, Up (kV)

This is the peak voltage the device can withstand for a 1.2/50 µs standard test wave.
Standard values for Up (source: IEC 62271-1):
Ur (kV) 3.6 7.2 12 17.5 24 36
Up (kV) 40 60 75 95 125 170
Rated frequency, fr (Hz)
This rating must match the system's operating frequency. Rated frequency only has to be marked on the device
nameplate if it is not suitable for 50 Hz and 60 Hz operation.

Rated current, Ir (A)

This is the rms level of current which can continuously flow through a device without exceeding its maximum
allowable contact temperature rise.
Temperature rise limits are defined in IEC 62271-1, for an ambient temperature of 40 °C.
The rated current must be greater than the maximum expected load current, at the point of installation.
Standard values for Ir : 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000 A (source: IEC 62271-1)

Rated short-time withstand current, Ik (kA)

This is the maximum rms symmetrical fault current the device can withstand, for a short time period, without risk of
damage. This rating must be higher than the prospective rms fault current at the point of installation.
Where:
Ik Is Ik = short-time withstand current rating (kA)
SSC Is = prospective rms fault current (kA)
Is=
3 ×U SSC = system short circuit power (kVA)
U = system operating voltage (kV)
Standard values for Ik : 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, 63 kA (source: IEC 62271-1)

Rated short circuit duration, tk (s)

This is the time the device can endure its rated short-time withstand current (Ik) without damage. This value must
be greater than the total expected clearing time of a fault at the point of installation.
Standard values for tk : 0.5, 1, 2, 3 seconds (source: IEC 62271-1)

If the value of tk is not 1 second, the rated short circuit duration must be published on the circuit breaker nameplate.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 91

SWITCHGEAR

Rated peak withstand current (kA)

This is the maximum peak fault current level which the device is able to close (make) on. This rating must be
greater than the expected peak let-through fault current (Ip) at the point of installation.
Rated peak withstand current ≥ Ip
Where:
Ip = 2.5 x Is (for a 50 Hz supply with a
Ip = asymmetrical peak let-through fault current, from the first fault
45 ms DC time constant)
loop (kA)
Ip = 2.6 x Is (for a 60 Hz supply with a
Is = rms symmetrical fault current level, with no DC component
45 ms DC time constant)
(kA)
Source: IEC 62271-1, IEC 62771-100
Rated short circuit breaking capacity, Isc (kA)
This is the highest level of rms current which the circuit breaker can successfully open (break) on a fault, at its rated
voltage. When a short circuit occurs in a 3-phase system, the initial fault current is asymmetrical and is made up of
an AC symmetrical component and a decaying DC component. The rated short circuit breaking capacity must be
greater than the expected asymmetrical fault current level when the circuit breaker poles are opened.
Where:
I SC I a Isc = rated short circuit breaking capacity of circuit breaker (kA)
Ia = asymmetrical fault current level when circuit breaker poles are
I a = I s + Id
opened (kA)
Is = AC symmetrical fault current component (kA)
Id = DC fault current component (kA)
Standard values for Isc = 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, 63 kA (source: IEC 62271-100)

Percentage DC component in fault current

100

90 4 = 120 ms
80 3 = 75 ms
Percentage DC component

70 2 = 60 ms
60

50

40

30

20 1 = 45 ms
10
13720.A

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Time interval from initiation of short circuit current (ms)

The graph illustrates the percentage DC component of a fault, over a period of time, for systems with various time
constants. Most systems use the standard time constant (1) of 45 ms. The total opening time of the circuit
breaker is the pole opening time plus 10 ms for relay sensing, and this figure can be used to determine the
percentage DC component of a fault at the instant of breaking.

Page 92 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Exercise
What is the required short circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker, with a pole opening time of 45 ms and an
expected symmetrical short circuit fault level of 21 kA at the point of installation?
Total opening time of the circuit breaker: t = 10 + 45 = 55 ms
The percentage DC component at a total opening time of 55 ms is 30%:
100

90

80
Percentage DC component

70

60

50 1 = 45 ms
40

30

20

10

13721.A
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Time interval from initiation of short circuit current (ms)

The asymmetrical fault current level is 23 kA. A circuit breaker with a rated short circuit breaking capacity (Isc) of
25 kA can be used.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 93

SWITCHGEAR

Transient recovery voltage, TRV

TRV is the voltage transient that appears across a circuit breaker pole when current flow is interrupted at its rated
voltage. TRV waveforms vary, depending on the characteristics of the supply and the load.
IEC 62271-100 specifies test conditions under which the circuit breaker must endure standard TRV waveforms.
The test results are published as specific circuit breaker nameplate ratings.
A circuit breaker must be able to break the current for any TRV condition likely to occur at the point of installation.
An IEC classification can be given to a circuit breaker, depending on its likelihood to restrike (ie re-establish the
current flow after the initial current has been disrupted). If restrike starts to occur on a regular basis, this usually
indicates that the circuit breaker needs maintaining (the insulation medium may be degraded or the contact
separation distance may need adjusting).
For 3-phase circuits, TRV refers to the voltage that will appear across the first pole to open. The ratio of TRV to
single phase voltage is referred to as the first-pole-to-clear factor and is 1.5 for systems up to 72.5 kV.

Rated TRV (Uc) for circuit breakers intended for use on cable systems (Class S1)
IEC 62271-100 defines standard TRV peak voltage ratings.

TRV withstand ratings for short circuit breaking current Isc

Ur (kV) 3.6 7.2 12 17.5 24 36
Uc (kV) 6.2 12.3 20.6 30 41.2 61.7
Source: IEC 62271-100
Where:
Uc = 1.715 x Ur Uc = TRV peak voltage value (kV)
Ur = rated voltage (kV)

Voltage envelope for a two parameter TRV waveform on a cable system less than 100 kV

Uc
Voltage

U'
13722.A

0 td t' t3 t
Time
Source: IEC 62271-100

Rated out-of-phase breaking current, Id (kA)

When a circuit breaker opens with its input and output voltages out-of-phase, larger than normal voltages will
appear across the circuit breaker poles. This condition reduces the circuit breaker's maximum breaking current
capability.

TRV withstand ratings for out-of-phase current Id

Ur (kV) 3.6 7.2 12 17.5 24 36
Uc (kV) 9.2 18.4 30.6 44.7 61.2 91.9
Source: IEC 62271-100
Where:
Uc = 2.551 x Ur Uc = TRV peak voltage value (kV)
Ur = rated voltage (kV)

Page 94 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Rated capacitive switching currents

IEC 62271-100 recommends capacitive switching current ratings for circuit breakers, based on the following
conditions:
Ic = rated cable charge breaking current (A)
Isb = rated single capacitor bank breaking current (A)
Ibb = rated back-to-back capacitor bank breaking current (A)
Ibi = rated back-to-back capacitor bank inrush making current (kA)

NOTE
These ratings are recommendations only. Individual circuit breaker ratings may specify different values.

Preferred values of rated capacitive switching currents

Rated voltage Rated cable charging Rated single capacitor Rated back-to-back Rated back-to-back
breaking current bank breaking current capacitor bank capacitor bank inrush
breaking current making current
Ur (kV rms) Ic (A rms) Isb (A rms) Ibb (A rms) Ibi (kA)
3.6 10 400 400 20
7.2 10 400 400 20
12 25 400 400 20
17.5 34.5 400 400 20
24 31.5 400 400 20
36 50 400 400 20
Derived from IEC 62771-100

IEC Classifications
Medium voltage circuit breakers can be type tested and categorised according to the classifications in
IEC 62271-100.

Classifications of switching devices

Class Description
C1 low probability of restrike during capacitive switching
C2 very low probability of restrike during capacitive switching
E1 standard electrical endurance
E2 extended electrical endurance, designed so no maintenance of circuit interrupting parts is
required during the expected operating life
M1 standard mechanical endurance (2000 operations)
M2 extended mechanical endurance (10000 operations)
S1 intended for use on cable systems
S2 intended for use on overhead line systems
Source: IEC 62271-100

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 95

SWITCHGEAR

Medium Voltage Contactors

Contactors are a 3-pole load break switch with minimal short circuit making and breaking current
capacity. Back-up short circuit protection fuses must be used; the contactor manufacturer will
specify the maximum allowable fuse size. The switching contacts are sealed inside the vacuum
interrupters and mechanical operation uses the magnetic technique.
13681.A

Medium voltage contactors are suitable for high frequency switching (>10,000 operations), with continuous AC3
current ratings greater than 800 A and rated voltages from 1 kV to 12 kV. Manufacturers provide standard
utilisation category ratings which can be matched to a specific application and the required number of operations.
Indoor contactors can be fixed or withdrawable style. Withdrawable style contactors can usually house primary
protection fuses.

Withdrawable style contactor Fixed style contactor

Construction
Medium voltage contactors usually consist of:
 flame retardant plastics to house the vacuum interrupters (and fuses, in the case of a withdrawable
contactor)
 metal chassis (and truck, in the case of a withdrawable contactor)
 busbars for main power circuit connections (or cluster style power connections, in the case of a
withdrawable contactor)
 magnetic and mechanical linkage components, for operation of the vacuum interrupter contacts
 auxiliary circuit components such as auxiliary contacts, truck position contacts, undervoltage or shunt trip
coils, interlock coil etc

Page 96 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

IEC Ratings
Medium voltage contactors must be type tested to provide standard ratings.
The contactor nameplate label must show the manufacturer's name, contactor model and serial number, and certain
rating information. Many manufacturers also provide additional rating information.

MV contactor rating information

Rating Description Required
on
nameplate?
Voltage Ur (kV)
Maximum operating voltage (rms) the device can Y
continuously withstand during normal operation. The
rated voltage must be greater than or equal to the system's
operating voltage.
Standard values for Ur : 3.6, 7.2, 12, 17.5, 24, 36 kV (source:
IEC 62271-1)
Insulation voltage Up (kV) Power frequency withstand voltage is an indication of the
insulation strength of the contactor.
Frequency fr (Hz) This rating must match the system's operating frequency. Y
Thermal current Ith (A) Maximum allowable continuous current, without the Y
contactor temperature rise limits being exceeded.
Service current Ie (A) Rated operational current, when being used for a specific Y
utilisation category.
Maximum making current Im (A) Maximum making current, without welding or adverse
erosion of contact material.
Maximum breaking current Ic (A) Maximum breaking current, without welding or adverse
erosion of contact material.
Short-time withstand current Ik (kA) Current (rms) which can be sustained in the closed
position, before external short circuit protection opens the
circuit.
Short-time withstand period tk (s) Time that the contactor can sustain Ik before damage is
likely to occur.
Auxiliary supply voltage Ua (V) Control supply voltage. Typical values are: Y
 110, 120, 220, 230, 240 VAC
 24, 48 VDC
 24-250 VAC/VDC (universal supply)
Operating voltage tolerance: +10/-15%
Drop-out range: >70/50%
Utilisation category Operational current rating, dependent on the device's use Y
and required number of operations.
Derived from IEC 62271-1 and IEC 62271-106.
Contactors are primarily selected by their rated voltage (Ur) and rated current for a specific utilisation category (Ie).

Medium voltage contactor utilisation categories

Utilisation category Typical application
AC1 Resistive or slightly inductive loads
AC2 Starting and running slip-ring motors
AC3 Starting and running induction motors
AC4 Reversing, plugging and inching induction motors
AC6b Switching single or back-to-back capacitor banks
Source: IEC 62271-106

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 97

SWITCHGEAR

Circuit Design (Motor circuit with fuses)

A contactor always needs some form of back-up short circuit protection. Although circuit breakers can be used for
this purpose, it is more common to use MV HRC fuses. Fuses have higher fault breaking capacity, are very fast acting
and are a good current limiting device.
Consider the following direct-on-line motor circuit, which includes a line contactor, short circuit protection fuses and
a motor protection relay, providing overload protection. Assume an operating supply of 6.6 kV/50 Hz and a motor
FLC of 120 A.

Typical DOL circuit with contactor, fuses and relay

M1
F1 K1 CT1
M
3
6.6 kV / 3
50 Hz
(FLC = 120 A)

13682.A
PR

Step 1: Select the contactor


Rated voltage Ur ≥ operating voltage U and AC3 rating Ie ≥ motor FLC
A 7.2 kV/50 Hz contactor with an AC3 rating of 200 A will be adequate
Step 2: Select the fuse
 The manufacturer will specify the maximum allowable fuse size. As a general rule, the nominal rating of
the fuse should be 1.5 times the motor FLC.
In this case
I(fuse) = 1.5 x 120
= 180 A
Use a 200 A fuse.
 On a time-current curve, check that the contactor thermal withstand curve lies outside the total clearing
curve of the fuse.
 From the fuse cut-off curve, the "limited" prospective short circuit current of the fuse must be less than the
short-time withstand current rating of the contactor.
Isc' (fuse) ≤ Ik (contactor)

Assume the 7.2 kV/50 Hz, 200 A contactor has a short-time withstand current rating Ik of 8 kA and the prospective
rms fault current level Isc at the point of installation is 10 kA.
100

50
Maximum cut-off current (kA) peak

20
315
250
200
160
10
100

63
5

2
13684.A

1.0 2 5 10 20 50 100

Prospective current (kA) rms

From the fuse cut-off curve, we can see that a prospective rms fault current of 10 kA (Isc) will be limited to 4 kA (Isc')
by the 200 A fuse. Check that Isc' (fuse) ≤ Ik (contactor).
4 kA ≤ 8 kA The fuse is suitable for use with the contactor.

Page 98 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Step 3: Select an overload curve


The nominal current setting of the curve is set for the motor FLC. In this case, set overload protection so
that In = 120 A
The overload curve (hot curve) needs to lie outside the motor start curve and intersect with the fuse curve at a point
before the maximum breaking current Ic of the contactor.

1 Motor FLC
3
Motor start current
Overload curve - nominal setting (In)
Overload curve - hot
4
Fuse total clearing curve
5
Contactor maximum break current (Ic)
Time (s)

Contactor thermal withstand curve

7
13525.A

Current (A)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 99

SWITCHGEAR

Medium Voltage Switches

Medium voltage switches for use on 1 kV to 52 kV indoor systems are predominantly used for isolation and earthing.
Although the majority of these switches are air insulated, gas insulated (SF6) combination switches are available,
which are designed for load and fault current switching.
Operation of a switch can be manual or motorised. International standards provide maximum torque levels
required to operate manual disconnect and earth switches. There must be a visual indication of the switch position
(by viewing the contacts or an indicator driven directly from the contacts).
Switch type Main function Description
Disconnector Isolation  Rated for carrying continuous load current with
(fixed or withdrawable) a short-time withstand fault current rating (Ik)
 No continuous overload capability
 No switching capability
 Used with a circuit breaker or contactor and
fuse combination
13692.A

13693.A

Switch-Disconnector Switching and isolation  Rated for carrying continuous load current with
(load-break isolator) a short-time withstand fault current rating (Ik)
 Can switch rated current (Ir) but has no fault
make capability
 Used with line fuses or a circuit breaker
13690.A

Earth switch Earthing  Rated for carrying continuous load current with
a short-time withstand fault current rating (Ik)
 No load switching capability, but can make on a
fault (Ip)
 Used with a circuit breaker or contactor and
fuse combination
13691.A

Gas insulated Earth-disconnector Switching, isolation and  Rated for carrying continuous load current with
(fixed or rotary) earthing a short-time withstand fault current rating (Ik)
 Can switch rated load current (Ir)
 Can make on fault current (Ip)
 Used with line fuses or a circuit breaker
13689.A
13688.A

Applications
A typical medium voltage metal-enclosed switchgear feeder circuit will have a combination of switchgear able to
provide the following functions:
 switching of load current
 short circuit protection
 means of isolation
 means of earthing
In most cases, air insulated earth switches or gas insulated earth-disconnectors, are used. The following examples
show common configurations for medium voltage, metal-enclosed switchgear feeder circuits.

Page 100 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Single line diagram Description

Withdrawable circuit breaker  The withdrawable circuit breaker provides load switching, short
circuit protection and circuit isolation when opened and in the
draw-out position.
 The cable-side earth switch is interlocked with the circuit breaker
and can only be closed when the circuit breaker is in the drawn-out
position.
 A protection device is required to provide overload and short circuit
13685.A

protection.
Withdrawable contactor  The withdrawable contactor with integrated fuses provides load
switching and circuit isolation when opened and in the draw-out
position. The fuses provide short circuit protection.
 The cable-side earth switch is interlocked with the contactor and
can only be closed when the contactor is in the drawn-out position.
13686.A

Gas insulated rotary disconnector  The gas insulated rotary disconnector has three physical operating
positions. It provides load switching in the ON position, isolation in
the OFF position and earthing in the EARTH position.
 Short circuit protection is provided by fuses, but a fixed type circuit
breaker could be used instead.
13686.A

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 101

SWITCHGEAR

IEC Ratings
Disconnectors and earth switches are type tested to specific IEC standards. IEC 62271-1 provides standard ratings
and IEC 62271-102 details test methods and specific requirements for medium voltage disconnectors and earth
switches.
The nameplate label must show the manufacturer's name, equipment model and serial number, and certain rating
information. Many manufacturers also provide additional rating information.
Rated voltage, Ur (kV)
Maximum operating voltage (rms) the device can continuously withstand during normal operation. The rated
voltage must be greater than or equal to the system's operating voltage.
Standard values for Ur : 3.6, 7.2, 12, 17.5, 24, 36 kV (source: IEC 62271-1)

MV switches tend to have a maximum Ur of 36 kV.

Rated lightning impulse withstand rating, Up (kV)
This is the peak voltage the device can withstand for a 1.2/50 µs standard test wave.
Standard values for Up (source: IEC 62271-1):
Ur (kV) 3.6 7.2 12 17.5 24 36
Up (kV) 40 60 75 95 125 170
Rated frequency, fr (Hz)
This rating must match the system's operating frequency. Rated frequency only has to be marked on the device
nameplate if it is not suitable for 50 Hz and 60 Hz operation.

Rated current, Ir (A)

This is the rms level of current which can continuously flow through a device without exceeding its maximum
allowable contact temperature rise.
Temperature rise limits are defined in IEC 62271-1, for an ambient temperature of 40 °C.
The rated current must be greater than the maximum expected load current, at the point of installation.
Standard values for Ir : 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000 A (source: IEC 62271-1)

MV switches tend to have a maximum Ir of 2500 A.

Rated short-time withstand current, Ik (kA)

This is the maximum rms symmetrical fault current the device can withstand, for a short time period, without risk of
damage. This rating must be higher than the prospective rms fault current at the point of installation.
Where:
Ik Is Ik = short-time withstand current rating (kA)
Is= SSC Is = prospective rms fault current (kA)
3 ×U SSC = system short circuit power (kVA)
U = system operating voltage (kV)
Standard values for Ik : 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, 63 kA (source: IEC 62271-1)

MV switches tend to have a maximum Ik of 31.5 A.

Rated short circuit duration, tk (s)

This is the time the device can endure its rated short-time withstand current (Ik) without damage. This value must
be greater than the total expected clearing time of a fault at the point of installation.
Standard values for tk : 0.5, 1, 2, 3 seconds (source: IEC 62271-1)

MV switches tend to have a tk rating of 1 second.

Page 102 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Rated peak withstand current (kA)

This is the maximum peak fault current level which the device is able to close (make) on. This rating must be
greater than the expected peak let-through fault current (Ip) at the point of installation.
Rated peak withstand current ≥ Ip
Where:
Ip = 2.5 x Is (for a 50 Hz supply with a
Ip = asymmetrical peak let-through fault current, from the first fault
45 ms DC time constant)
loop (kA)
Ip = 2.6 x Is (for a 60 Hz supply with a
Is = rms symmetrical fault current level, with no DC component
45 ms DC time constant)
(kA)
Source: IEC 62271-1, IEC 62771-100

MV earth switches tend to have a maximum Ip of 82 kA.

Electrical endurance class

This class defines the fault making capability of earth switching devices.
E0 (Standard electrical endurance): No fault making capability
E1 (Extended electrical endurance): Capable of 2 fault making operations without damage
E2 (Highest electrical endurance): Capable of 5 fault making operations without damage

Mechanical endurance class

This class defines the mechanical endurance of no-load disconnectors.
M0 (Standard electrical endurance): 1000 operating cycles without maintenance
M1 (Extended electrical endurance): 2000 operating cycles without maintenance
M2 (Highest electrical endurance): 10000 operating cycles without maintenance

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 103

SWITCHGEAR

Medium Voltage HRC Fuses

Medium voltage high-rupturing-capacity (HRC) fuses are constructed of narrow
conductor bands which are shaped to melt in overload or short circuit conditions.
The conductor bands are configured in a spiral, embedded in quartz sand filling and
totally sealed within a high thermally resistive ceramic housing. Each end of the fuse
has either end caps for fitting into fuse bases or bolt style terminations for busbar fixing.
Most fuse types come with the option of a striker pin or fuse-blow pin, which is
activated immediately after the fuse has ruptured. The striker pin can directly trip a
disconnect switch or operate auxiliary contacts.
Although fuses provide a form of overload protection, their main use is for short circuit
protection. One of the major advantages of fuses over circuit breaker protection is
their ability to limit the rms and peak values of the prospective short circuit current
immediately downstream at the point of installation.

Fuse selection depends on the maximum load current, type of load, prospective fault current, system voltage and
ambient temperature of the installation. In a 3-phase installation, it is assumed that all three fuses are subjected to the
same rate of degradation. If one fuse ruptures, it is highly recommended that all three be replaced.
Two categories of fuses are commonly use for medium voltage primary and secondary switchgear installations.
 General purpose fuses (also called E-rated fuses by NEMA) are typically used in combination with
contactors or switch-disconnectors.
 Motor rated fuses (also called R-rated fuses by NEMA) are used for motor feeder circuits, and must be
used in conjunction with a thermal overload protective device. Motor rated fuses have time delayed,
time-current curves and higher minimum melt characteristics to accommodate the high currents associated
with motor starting.
Fuse characteristics
Pre-arcing curves
Pre-arcing curves are sometimes referred to as time-current curves. They indicate minimum break currents and the
ability for a fuse to pass through medium level overload current, such as motor starting current. The dashed part of
each fuse curve indicates an area of uncertain fuse interruption.

Sample fuse pre-arcing curves

m
Pre-arcing time (seconds or minutes)

6 10 16 20 25 31.5 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200

2 3 4

Prospective current (A)

Source: example curves based on ABB CEF fuse links

Page 104 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Example
A fuse with a nominal rating of 50 A has a minimum break current of 200 A and is capable of passing an overload
current of 240 A for 10 seconds.
Let-through curves
Sometimes referred to as cut-off curves, they indicate the ability of a fuse to limit the peak let-through and rms values
of short circuit current, immediately downstream of the fuse installation.

Sample fuse let-through curves

100

0
20
0
16
5
10 120
Maximum cut-off current (kA, peak)

10
80
63
50
40 .5
31
25
20
16
10
6

0.1
13698.A

0.01 0.1 1 10 Jp 100

Prospective current (kA, rms)
Source: example curves based on ABB CEF fuse links

Example
If the prospective rms fault current was 5 kA, the peak let-through current would be approximately 12 kA without
a fuse. If a 50 A fuse was installed, the rms fault current would be limited to 1.5 kA and the peak let-through current
would be 3.8 kA downstream of the fuse.
I2t data
Fuse data sheets provide two I2t figures:

minimum I2t is the amount of let-through energy required to start a fuse melt and create an arc

maximum I2t is the total amount of let-through energy required to extinguish an arc and completely
rupture (open circuit) a fuse.
This data is important for fuse discrimination. The maximum I 2t of the downstream fuse must be less than the
minimum I2t of the upstream fuse.
If a fuse is selected to protect a cable, the maximum I2t of the fuse must be greater than the A2S2 thermal rating of
the cable.
Ratings
Irrespective of which standard a fuse has been type tested too, the following generic ratings usually apply. Different
standards require different rating information to be published on the fuse nameplate.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 105

SWITCHGEAR

Nominal current, In (A)

This is the maximum continuous current a fuse can sustain without risk of rupturing. It takes into account the
method of installation and the expected ambient temperature. Manufacturers provide derating factors for high
ambient and special mounting configurations.
Typical nominal current ratings:
In = 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315 A
For a given fuse type and size, the maximum possible nominal current reduces as the nominal voltage increases.
Example:
For a 12 kV general purpose 442 mm style fuse, it is common to have a maximum nominal current rating of 200 A.
However, for the equivalent 7.2 kV fuse, the maximum nominal current rating might be 315 A.
Minimum breaking current (A)
This is the minimum current guaranteed to rupture the fuse and can be obtained from the pre-arcing curves or the
fuse data sheet. This is determined by the overload characteristics of the fuse. Depending on the fuse type, it can
be anywhere from 2 to 4 times the nominal rating of the fuse. Overload currents below the minimum breaking
current are not guaranteed to rupture the fuse.
Maximum breaking current (kA)
This is the maximum safe rupturing current, determined by the short-circuit characteristics of the fuse. The
maximum breaking current must be higher than the prospective short circuit current at the point of installation.
The current limiting nature of a fuse means the equipment downstream can have a short circuit withstand rating
which is much less than the prospective short circuit current.
Nominal voltage, Un (kV)
This is the rated voltage of the fuse and must be greater than or equal to the operating voltage of the system. In the
case of capacitor applications, it is recommended that the fuse's nominal voltage be twice the rated voltage of the
capacitor bank.
Typical nominal voltage ratings:
Un = 3.6, 7.2, 12, 17.5, 24, 36 kV
Selection
Cable protection
The nominal current rating of the fuse must be equal to or less than the current rating of the cable after cable
derating factors have been applied.
In (FUSE) ≤ I_CABLE
The maximum I2t (total clearing I2t) of the fuse must be less than the A2S2 thermal rating of the cable.
I2t (FUSE) ≤ A2S2 (CABLE)
Switchgear apparatus
If a medium voltage fuse is used in combination with a switch-disconnector or contactor, the nominal current rating
of the fuse is determined predominantly by the load. However, such switching devices have a relatively low
maximum breaking current compared with fuses, so switchgear manufacturers stipulate a maximum sized fuse which
can be used with their switching device.
Power transformers
Fuse manufacturers provide selection tables for the primary input of a medium voltage power transformer. These
tables consider the transformer's power rating S (kVA) and nominal primary voltage rating U_ PRIM (kV). The
information may also specify the maximum sized fuse required on the low voltage transformer secondary output, for
coordination with the primary input fuse.
If the manufacturer's selection tables are not available, select a general purpose (E-rated) fuse with a nominal current
rating of 1.5 to 2 times the primary current rating of the transformer:
In (FUSE) = (1.5 x I_PRIM) ~ (2.0 x I_PRIM)
Where

Page 106 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Exercise
Select the primary input fuses required to protect an 11 kV/400 VAC, 1000 kVA, 3-phase power transformer.

The range of In(FUSE) is 97.5~106 A. Use 100 A/12 kV, E-rated primary fuses.

Capacitor banks
Two primary factors affect fuse ratings when used with capacitor banks:
 the peak inrush current which flows when a capacitor bank is energised. This can be up to 100 times the
nominal current rating of the capacitor bank.
 transient voltages produced during capacitor bank switching.

Individual 3-phase capacitor bank

In (FUSE) = 2 x I_CAP
Un (FUSE) = 2 x U_CAP

Back-to-back 3-phase capacitor bank

In (FUSE) = 3 x I_CAP
Un (FUSE) = 2 x U_CAP

Exercise
Select the protection fuse required for a 300 kVAr/7.2 kV individual 3-phase capacitor bank.
I_CAP

n(FUSE) I_CAP

n(FUSE) U_CAP

Use 50 A/17.5 kV, general purpose fuses

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 107

SWITCHGEAR

Motor circuits
Special motor rated fuses are used for motor starting. These fuses can sustain repeated motor start overload
currents without degradation. Fuses are installed to provide short circuit protection only and the motor circuit
must have separate overload protection.
Fuse selection for a motor application is typically carried out using graphs provided by the fuse manufacturer. These
graphs consider motor starting current (A), motor run-up time (s) and starts per hour.

Typical fuse ratings for 2, 4 or 8 starts per hour, starting time  60 seconds

Starts per hour

1
8
2 x 315 4
Fuse rating (A)

2 x 250 2
2 x 200
315
250
200
160

100

13697.A
63

200 1000 10000

Motor starting current (A)

Typical fuse ratings for 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 starts per hour, starting time  15 seconds

1
32 Starts per hour
16
2 x 315
8
2 x 250 4
2 x 200 2
Fuse rating (A)

315
250

200

160

100
13745.A

63
200 1000 10000
Motor starting current (A)

Source: example curves based on ABB CMF fuse links

Exercise
A 3.3 kV motor has a full load current of 150 A. Its expected start current is 5.5 times full load current for 10 seconds
and it operates at 2 starts per hour. Select the required protection fuse.
Use the graph for Starting time  15 seconds. The start current will be 5.5 x 150 A = 825 A.
For motor starting current of 825 A, at 2 starts per hour, the required motor rated fuse is 250 A/3.6 kV.

Page 108 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Motor circuit coordination

Consider the following motor branch circuit.

Motor circuit with fuse and contactor

M1
F1 K1 CT1
M
3
3

13696.A
O/L

The circuit components and protection must be coordinated to achieve the following results

2 Motor start current

Thermal relay protection curve
Fuse trip curve
Contactor maximum break current
5
Motor thermal withstand
Cable thermal withstand
Time (s)

1
6

3
13783.A

Current (A)

Coordination requirements:
 The expected motor start current curve (1) must sit inside (to the left) of the thermal relay protection
curve (2) and the fuse trip curve (3).
 The intersection of the thermal relay protection curve and the fuse trip curve must have a lower current
value that the maximum breaking current of the contactor (4).
 The fuse rating must not exceed the maximum size stated by the contactor manufacturer.
 The thermal withstand curves of the motor (5) and the cable (6) must sit outside (to the right) of the
thermal relay protection curve and the fuse trip curve.
 The short circuit withstand current rating of the contactor must exceed the expected rms short circuit
current downstream of the fuse after current limiting.
 If a back-up fuse is installed upstream, its minimum I2t value must be greater than the maximum I2t value of
the motor branch fuse.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 109

SWITCHGEAR

Current Transformers
A current transformer (CT) is designed to produce a secondary current which is accurately proportional to the
primary current. It consists of a single primary winding, which an external busbar or cable runs through, or it can
have a single primary bar, brought out to two ends for termination. A medium voltage current transformer can
have up to three independent secondary winding sets. The entire current transformer assembly is encapsulated in
resin, inside an insulated casing
Current transformers are used for metering or protection purposes. The accuracy class and size depends on the
individual application - for example, revenue metering would use high accuracy metering CTs.

NOTE
Never leave the secondary winding of a CT open circuit. This creates extremely high voltages which pose
a real danger to personnel.
Ring style CT DIN style CT

IEC Ratings
Rated primary current, Ipr (A)
The primary current rating of a CT must be greater than the expected maximum operating current it is monitoring.
 a metering CT's primary current rating should not exceed 1.5 times the maximum operating current
 a protection CT's primary current rating needs to be chosen so that the protection pick-up level is attained
during a fault
Standard values for Ipr : 10, 12.5, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75 A, and decimal multiples of these values (source:
IEC 60044-1)

Rated secondary current, Isr

The secondary current rating of a CT is either 1 A or 5 A. CTs with a 5 A secondary rating are becoming less
common as more CT driven equipment becomes digital. For long secondary cable runs, CTs with 1 A secondary
windings can minimise the transformer and secondary cable size.

Transformer ratio, Kn
This is the ratio of secondary to primary winding turns.

Rated thermal short-time withstand current, Ith (kA)

This is the highest level of rms primary fault current which the CT can endure, both thermally and dynamically, for
1 second without damage. When used in a medium voltage enclosure, the Ith rating should match the short-time
withstand rating of the entire switchgear.

Page 110 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Overcurrent coefficient, Ksi

This is the ratio of a CT's short-time withstand current rating to its primary current rating.

This coefficient indicates how difficult it would be to manufacture a CT. A higher coefficient means a physically
larger CT, which is more difficult to manufacture.
Ksi < 100 : easy to manufacture
Ksi 100 ~ 500 : difficult to manufacture, with certain limitations
Ksi > 500 : extremely difficult to manufacture

Rated primary circuit voltage, Up (kV)

The primary circuit voltage rating indicates the level on insulation provided by the CT. If a ring type CT is installed
around a cable or bushing, the insulation level can be provided by the cable or bushing.
Rated primary voltage Suitable operating range Power frequency withstand Lightning impulse withstand
voltage voltage
Upr (kV) U (kV) (kV) rms for 1 minute (kV) peak, 1.2/50 µs
7.2 3.3~7.2 20 60
12 6~12 28 75
17.5 10~17.5 38 95
24 12~24 50 125
36 20`36 70 170
Source: IEC 62271-1
Rated frequency, fr (Hz)
This rating must match the system's operating frequency. Standard frequencies are 50 Hz and 60 Hz.

A 50 Hz CT can be used on a 60 Hz system, but a 60 Hz CT cannot be used on a 50 Hz system.

Rated real output power (VA)

The maximum power a CT secondary can deliver, to guarantee its accuracy and performance. The total sum VA
(including cable, connectors and load) must not exceed the rated real output power of the CT.
Standard values are: 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 15 VA
 Cable burden
Where:
k = 0.44 for 5 A secondary, = 0.0176 for 1 A secondary
L = total feed/return length of cable (metres)
S = cross sectional area of copper cable (mm2)
 Metering instrument burden
Metering instrument (digital) = 1 VA (approx)
Metering instrument (electromagnetic or induction) = 3 VA (approx)
Transducer (self powered) = 3 VA (approx)
 Protection instrument burden
Protection instrument (digital) = 1 VA (approx)
Protection instrument (electromagnetic overcurrent) = 3-10 VA (approx)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 111

SWITCHGEAR

Exercises
1. A CT with a 1 A secondary is connected to an electromagnetic ammeter located10 metres away, using 2.5 mm2
copper cable. Calculate the minimum required VA rating of the CT.

The total burden is 3.14 VA. Use a 5 VA CT.

2. A CT with a 5 A secondary is connected to a digital protection relay located 2 metres away, using 1.5 mm2 copper
cable. Calculate the minimum required VA rating of the CT.

The total burden is 2.17 VA. Use a 2.5 VA CT.

Metering class
A metering class indicates the accuracy of the CT secondary current at 5 to 125% of rated primary current. Above
this level, the CT starts to saturate and the secondary current is clipped to protect the inputs of a connected
metering instrument.
 general metering CT would use a metering class CL 0.5 – 1.0
 revenue metering CT would use a metering class CL 0.2 – 0.5

Operating range for metering class current transformer

Saturation
1
Linear operating range, at accuracy
class tolerance
Flux ()

13702.A
5% 125%
Ipr (%)

Page 112 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Protection class CT
A protection class CT provides a linear transformation of the primary to secondary current at high overload levels.
This characteristic makes them suitable for use with overcurrent protection relays. A relay trip setting is normally
10~15 times the maximum load current and this level should fall on the linear part of the CT secondary current
curve. If a CT saturates before the relay trip level is reached, the fault will remain undetected, leading to equipment
damage and serious danger to personnel.
The most commonly used protection class is a 5PX, where X is the accuracy limit factor (ALF) or multiplication
factor of the rated primary current. The secondary current is +/-1% accurate at rated primary current and +/-5%
accurate at X times rated primary current.
Typical protection class CT ratings are 5P10, 5P15, 5P20.

Operating range for protection class current transformer

Saturation
Isc
Linear operating range, at accuracy class
1 tolerance
Ideal protection setting trip zone
50%~100% ALF
Flux ()

100% ALF 13701.A

Ipr (%)
Example
A 200/1 A CT has a protection class rating of 5P15.
The secondary current is guaranteed to be linear up to 15 times the rated primary current. The secondary current
will be 1 A (+/-1%) at 200 A primary current and 15 A (+/-5%) at 3000 A primary current. For guaranteed
operation, any overcurrent trip setting should be between 7.5 ~ 15 A secondary current.
Selection
The main considerations for selecting a CT are the primary and secondary current ratio, real output power rating
(VA) and accuracy class. Secondary selection considerations are rated primary voltage, frequency and thermal
short-time withstand current.
Primary and secondary current ratio
Rated primary current, Ipr (A)
Incomer from transformer: Ipr ≥ 1.0-1.25 of nominal source current
Feeder to transformer: Ipr ≥ 1.0-1.25 of transformer's rated primary current
Feeder to motor: Ipr ≥ 1.0-1.5 of motor full load current
Feeder to capacitor bank: Ipr ≥ 1.3-1.5 of nominal capacitor current
Rated secondary current, Isr (A)
Use 1 A and 5 A for local installation.
Use 1 A for remote installation.
Real output power (VA)
The real output rating of the CT must be the next highest nominal size above the expected total burden on the CT
secondary. Total burden is the sum of output cable, connectors and instruments.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 113

SWITCHGEAR

Class type
Use a metering class CT for metering and indication. A higher class CT gives greater accuracy between the primary
and secondary currents.
Use a 5PX protection class CT for current based protection relay inputs. The ALF must be selected so that the
relay trip point lies on the linear part of the secondary current curve, between 50% and 100% of the ALF.

Page 114 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Exercise
Select appropriate CTs for the following transformer incomer and feeder circuits.
Transformer Incomer
 MV/MV transformer (TXR1): 5 MVA, 36/11 kV,
TXR1 36/11kV 10% Z
 Instantaneous overcurrent trip setting = 15 x In
for digital protection relay (OC1) driven off CT1-2
CT1-1 A
 Electromagnetic ammeter (A) is driven off CT1-1
CT1-2 OC1 Transformer Feeder
 MV/LV transformer (TXR2): 2 MVA, 11/0.4 kV,
1 5% Z
 Instantaneous overcurrent trip setting = 10 x In
for digital protection relay (OC2) driven off CT2

CT2 OC2

TXR2 11/0.4kV
13703.A

Exercise 1: Metering CT1-1 for transformer incomer circuit:

Step1: Calculate transformer TXR1 nominal secondary current, In (A)

The secondary current for TXR1 is 262 A

Step 2: Calculated maximum expected short circuit current at CT1 installation, Isc (A)
Ignoring any power cable or busbar impedances:

The maximum expected short circuit current at CT1 is 2620 A

Step 3: Select metering CT1-1 ratings

Primary rated current, Ipr = (1.0-1.25) x In = (1.0-1.25) x 262 A
Use a rating of 300 A
Secondary rated current, Isr
Use a rating of 1 A
Short-time withstand rating, Ith ≥ Isc
Use a rating of 10 kA
Primary circuit voltage, Up ≥ U
Use a rating of 12 kV
Real output power: typically > 3 VA for electromagnetic type meter
Use 5 VA (this allows 2 VA for cable burden, etc)
Accuracy Class
Use Class 1.0 (common class for general metering)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 115

SWITCHGEAR

Exercise 2: Protection CT1-2 for transformer incomer circuit:

Step1: Select ratings common to both the metering and protection CTs
Primary/secondary rated current = Use 300/1 A
Short-time withstand rating, Ith = Use 10 kA rating
Primary circuit voltage, Up = Use 12 kV rating
Step 2: Select real output power
Real output power: typically > 1VA for digital type protection relay
= Use 2.5 VA (this allows 1.5 VA for cable burden, etc)
Step 3: Calculate protection class 5PX
The instantaneous trip current level of protection relay OC1 is set to 15 x In.
I_TRIP = 15 x 262
= 3930 A (primary current)
(Note: In most digital protection relays, the trip current levels are set with respect to the secondary current. In this
case

SEC
300

The instantaneous trip current level for the CT secondary is 13.1 A

The trip current level should fall between 100 to 50% of the accuracy limit factor (ALF).
Using an ALF of 10 (5P10), the trip current level of 3930 A falls outside the range 100% to 50% ALF, so a 5P10
protection class CT is not suitable.
)

Using an ALF of 15 (5P15), the trip current level of 3930 A falls within the range 100% to 50% ALF so a 5P15
protection class CT is suitable.

Use protection class 5P15

Page 116 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Exercise 3: Protection CT2 for transformer feeder circuit:

Step1: Calculate transformer TXR2 nominal primary current, In (A)

The primary current for TXR2 is 105 A

Step 2: Calculated maximum expected short circuit current at CT2 installation, Isc (A)
Ignoring any power cable or busbar impedances:
Isc In

The maximum expected short circuit current at CT2 is 2100 A

Step 3: Select protection CT2 ratings
Primary rated current Ipr = (1.0-1.25) x In
= (1.0-1.25) x 105
Use a rating of 150A
Secondary rated current Isr
Use a rating of 1 A
Short-time withstand rating, Ith ≥ Isc
Use a rating of 10 kA
Primary circuit voltage Up ≥ U
Use a ratings of 12 kV
Real output power: typically > 1 VA for digital type protection relay.
Use 2.5 VA (this allows 1.5 VA for cable burden, etc)
Step 4: Calculate protection class 5PX
The instantaneous trip current level of protection relay OC2 is set to 10 x I n
I_trip = 10 x 105
= 1050 A (primary current)
(Note: In most digital protection relays, the trip current levels are set with respect to the secondary current. In this
case
SEC

The instantaneous trip current level for the CT secondary is 7 A

The trip current level should fall between 100 to 50% of the accuracy limit factor (ALF).
Using an ALF of 10 (5P10), the trip current level of 1050 A falls within the range of 100% to 50% ALF so a 5P10
protection class CT is suitable.
)

Use protection class 5P10

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 117

SWITCHGEAR

NEMA/IEEE Ratings
These ratings are typically used for current transformers manufactured or used in North American installations. As
well as a stated primary to secondary nominal current ratio, the device also carries an overall accuracy rating in the
format
Where:
AC = accuracy class
AC-CR-BU
CR = class rating
BU = maximum burden (ohms)
Accuracy class
Designates the accuracy of the secondary current with respect to the primary rated current. This accuracy is only
guaranteed provided the maximum burden is not exceeded.
Accuracy class Tolerance at 100% primary current
1.2 ±1.2%
0.6 ±0.6%
0.5 ±0.5%
0.3 ±0.3%
Class rating
Designates the intended application of the device.
B= for metering applications
H= for protection applications. The CT secondary accuracy is guaranteed at 5 to 20 times the nominal
primary rated current
Burden
The maximum load allowed to be connected to the current transformer secondary, to guarantee the accuracy class.
The maximum burden includes secondary cable/wire, connectors and the load. The following table converts burden
in ohms to VA, for a 5 A secondary.
 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.20 0.24 0.28 0.32 0.36 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80
VA 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20
Examples
0.5-B-0.1 indicates a current transformer with an accuracy of ±0.5%, and a maximum allowable secondary burden of
0.1  (or 2.5 VA on a 5 A secondary CT). This is a metering class rated current transformer.
1.2-H-0.2 indicates a current transformer with an accuracy of ±1.2%, and a maximum allowable secondary burden
of 0.2  (or 5 VA on a 5 A secondary CT). This is a protection class rated current transformer.

Page 118 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Current Sensors
The basic principle of any current sensor is to produce a small level of secondary voltage, within a specific accuracy
range, which is directly proportional to the measured primary current. In medium voltage applications, isolation
between the primary and secondary circuits is critical.
Although current transformers are the most commonly used device for measuring current, there are a number of
other methods available. Current sensors are usually designed and supplied by manufacturers as proprietary
equipment to match a digital metering or protection relay. Low power current sensors are ideal for use with
modern digital relays, which provide a low burden. Sometimes referred to as hybrid current sensors, each type has
its own merits.

Rogowski coil
A rogowski coil consists of a single primary winding, which is normally a copper bar with termination points at both
ends. The secondary winding is made up of multiple turns on a toroidal, non-ferrous core. The entire construction
is encased in a dielectric insulation material.
The basic operating principle is that the voltage produced across a high impedance secondary load is directly
proportional to the primary current. Accuracy is typically ±1% up to 10 times the rated primary current and ±5%
up to 200 times the rated primary current.
The customer must specify the required nominal primary current, short-time fault current withstand rating and the
insulation level requirements. No other specifications apply, as rogowski coils are supplied by the manufacturer as
a matched item with the associated relay device.

Current to be measured
1
Secondary winding
2
Non-ferromagnetic support
3
Output voltage

4
Z
13750.A

Hall effect sensor

Hall effect sensors consist of a semiconductor hall cell placed in the air-gap of a magnetic circuit. The strength of the
magnetic circuit is directly influenced by the primary current. The hall cell is supplied by a steady-state current and
the generated secondary output voltage is proportional to the magnetic field strength.
Inaccuracies in this measurement method are compensated for by using integrated digital circuitry.
Hall effect sensors are usually integrated into other equipment for measurement of AC and DC primary current.

Current to be measured
Magnetic circuit
2
4 Hall cell
Hall cell supply current
Hall output voltage
3 5 Voltage or current amplifier
1 +
6
-
13751.A

Zero flux current transformer

A zero flux current transformer consists of a single primary winding and a secondary made up of two windings on a
toroidal magnetic core. The first secondary winding cancels out the flux in the magnetic core (hence the name zero

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 119

SWITCHGEAR

flux). The second winding generates a current in the secondary load, which is directly proportional to the measured
primary current.
This method is very accurate with a tolerance in the order of ±0.02%. A zero flux CT can only be used to measure
DC primary current.

Current to be measured
1
Magnetic circuit
2 4 Secondary winding
Secondary circuit current
3
Zero flux detection winding
Z Current amplifier
5

6
13752.A

Page 120 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Protection Devices
Protection devices are used in medium voltage distribution systems to protect line and cable feeders, busbar
systems, transformers, motors, generators and power factor correction banks. Abnormal conditions can be
detected based on secondary current and voltage measurement, or temperature monitoring using thermal devices.
When an abnormal condition is detected, correct coordination of the protection devices will rapidly isolate the fault
to a specific zone in the system.
Older protection devices relied on electromechanical relays to measure system parameters. Modern protection
devices are exclusively low consumption, digital, and microprocessor based, with many communication options
available. Modern high-end protection devices incorporate many parameter settings along with programmable
logic control which provides not only protection functions, but switchgear control and interlocking.
Protection devices are primarily covered by IEC 60255-1.

Protection functions
Overcurrent
This is the most widely used form of protection. In a 3-phase power system, all three line currents are measured
using current transformers. The secondary output of a 1 A or 5 A current transformer is connected to the current
input of a protection device. Within the protection device, analog signals are filtered and sampled before being
converted to digital signals for processing. A trip condition occurs if a preset current level is exceeded for a specific
time.
There are two basic methods of overcurrent protection:
 Time-overcurrent protection - provides overload protection similar to a bimetallic thermal overload
device, except thermal modelling adjusts the trip curve shape to allow for dynamic heating and cooling
conditions. If the measured current reaches a point on the overload curve, a trip will occur.
Time-overcurrent is also referred to as "inverse" (I) protection
 Instantaneous overcurrent protection - provides medium level and high level short circuit protection. If a
set current level is exceeded for set time period, a trip will occur. This protection is also referred to as
definite minimum time (DMT) protection.

Devices may combine time-overcurrent and instantaneous overcurrent protection. Time-overcurrent is normally
only applied to electrical machines such as transformers and motors, whereas instantaneous overcurrent is applied
to cables, busbar systems etc. Overcurrent protection can be directional, which is sometimes used for more
advanced selective isolation of faults.

Overcurrent protection

1
Time overcurrent (I)
Time (s)

Instantaneous overcurrent (DMT)

13753.A

Current (A)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 121

SWITCHGEAR

Overcurrent protection based on measuring the 3-phase line currents, produces positive sequence current (I 1,
indicative of phase-to-phase faults) or negative phase sequence current (I2, indicative of phase loss or phase
imbalance). Overcurrent protection based on measuring the residual or ground current, produces zero sequence
current (I0, indicative of ground fault or earth leakage).
The configuration of the CTs depends on the functionality of the protection device:

Line current protection Line current and residual current protection

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

I_A
I_A

I_B

I_B

I_C

I_C
Io
13758.A

13759.A
Positive sequence current, I1 Positive sequence current, I1
Negative sequence current, I2 Negative sequence current, I2
Zero sequence current, I0

Ground current protection Ground current protection

HV
13760.A

TXR
Zero sequence current, I0
1

MV
Io
13761.A

Zero sequence current, I0

Page 122 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Differential
In medium voltage installations, differential protection is mainly used on transformers, motors and generators. Line
currents are measured on both sides of the device, to determine the difference between the input and output
currents (individual or 3-phase average). If the difference exceeds a preset limit, this indicates a phase loss or short
circuit fault condition. A trip will occur, isolating the affected electrical device from the rest of the system.

Transformer application

2 HV supply

3
CT1 CT2
3
Transformer
1 4
Differential protection device
MV supply

13756.A
3

MV motor application

Incoming supply
CT1 CT2
3 2 3 MV motor
1 M
Differential protection device
13756.A

MV generator application

Output supply
CT1 CT2
3 2 3 MV generator
1 G
Differential protection device
13757.A

Bus zone
This protection is used on bus distribution systems. The 3-phase line currents are measured on all feeders
connected to a busbar system. The sum of currents entering should equal the sum of currents leaving the busbar
system. If the difference in individual or 3-phase average currents is not close to zero, a trip will occur.
Bus configurations can be complex, but by using the status information of all the switching devices on a busbar
system, logic within the protection device can selectively isolate the faulty zone.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 123

SWITCHGEAR

Distance
This protection is predominantly used on long transmission lines running between primary substations, with radial
feeders along the length of the transmission line. The distance to a fault is determined by calculating the line fault
impedance with a healthy line impedance. Both line voltages and currents are measured to calculate the fault
impedance.
Selective line isolation is achieved by setting a trip zone within the protection device. This trip zone covers a specific
distance along the length of the transmission line from where the protection device is installed. Protection devices
are used in pairs installed at each end of a transmission line, and a fast speed, real-time communication link is required
between devices.

Distance protection system

2

Za Zb
CT CT

VT VT
1 5

4 4

13754.A
3

Substation A Distance protection device

Radial feeders Substation B
Communication link

Voltage
Voltage protection is often used on transformers, motor, generators and power factor banks which can be damaged
due to long term undervoltage or overvoltage conditions.
If the average 3-phase or any individual line voltage falls outside a specific range for a specific period, a trip will occur.
A time delay is used to override temporary surges and dips in the mains voltage.

Page 124 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

ANSI protection codes

The American National Standards Institute developed a standardised table of numerical codes indicating specific
protection functions. These codes are internationally recognised, and are often used in single line diagrams or
tender documents as part of a project specification.

ANSI codes commonly specified for medium voltage feeders, transformers, motor and power factor banks.
ANSI Function Description Application Components
code required
CT VT

Incomer feeder

Power factor
Transformer

Motor
panel

bank
24 Volts per hertz Activates if the Volts/Hertz ratio falls X X
relay outside a preset range.
25 Synchronising or Operates when the voltage, frequency, X X
synch-check and phase angles between two AC
device systems are within a preset acceptable
range.
26 Apparatus Activates if the monitored apparatus X X X
device exceeds a preset temperature.
27 Undervoltage Activates if the voltage falls below a preset X X X X
relay level.
37 Undercurrent/ Activates if the current or power falls X X
power relay below a preset level.
38 Bearing Activates when the upper temperature X
protective limit of a machine bearing is exceeded or
device abnormal bearing wear is detected.
46 Phase reversal or Monitors line currents and activates when X X X
current phase reversal is detected or when line
imbalance relay current imbalance of negative phase
sequence currents fall outside a preset
range.
47 Phase sequence Monitors line voltages and activates when X X
voltage relay phase reversal is detected.
48 Incomplete Trips or turns off a device if a particular X
sequence relay sequence has not been completed within
a preset time period.
49 Machine or Activates if the monitored machine or X X X
(P,R) transformer transformer part exceeds a preset
thermal relay temperature.
(P = PTC, R = RTD)
50 AC Activates if the current or di/dt values X X X X X
(N,G) instantaneous or exceed a preset level. Normally indicates a
di/dt relay medium to high level fault condition.
(N = neutral, G = ground)
51 AC Activates when the current exceeds a X X X X X
(N,G) time-overcurren preset level based on a thermal overload
t relay trip curve.
(N = neutral, G = ground)
59 Overvoltage Activates if the voltage exceeds a preset X X X X
relay level.
64 Ground (earth) Activates when earth current flow is X X X
detector relay detected from the frame, chassis, case or
structure of a device, indicating a
breakdown of insulation in an electrical
machine or transformer.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 125

SWITCHGEAR

ANSI Function Description Application Components

code required
CT VT

Incomer feeder

Power factor
Transformer

Motor
panel

bank
67 AC directional Activates when the current, flowing in a X X
current relay specific direction, exceeds a preset level.
This protection is based on 50 and 51
functions.
79 AC reclosing Controls the automatic reclosing and X
relay locking-out of an AC circuit switching
device.
81 Frequency relay Activates if the frequency falls outside a X X X X
preset range.
86 Locking-out Shuts down or holds equipment out of X
relay service under abnormal conditions. May
be manually or electrically operated.
87 (L, Differential Activates if the detected current on X X X
T, M) protection relay opposite sides of a machine or
transformer are not equal to each other.
(L = line, T = transformer,
G = generator)

AuCom soft starter ANSI protection functions

The following ANSI code protections are standard in AuCom medium voltage soft starters. For details of additional
protections in MVS and MVX which are not listed in this table, refer to the relevant user manual.
ANSI ANSI Function MVS/MVX Trip
Code
26 Apparatus device Motor thermal model
27/59 Under/overvoltage relay Undervoltage and overvoltage
37 Undercurrent/power relay Undercurrent
46 Phase reversal or current imbalance relay Phase sequence and current imbalance
48 Incomplete sequence relay Excess start time
50 AC instantaneous or di/dt relay Instantaneous overcurrent
51 AC time-overcurrent relay Time-overcurrent
64 Ground (earth) detector relay Ground fault
81 Frequency relay Supply frequency

Temperature related protection functions such as motor winding and bearing protection require a separate
protection device which can be installed in the LV section of the soft starter panel.

Page 126 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Voltage Transformers
A voltage transformer (VT) or instrument transformer is used to produce a lower secondary voltage which is directly
proportional to the primary voltage both in value and phase angle.
In medium voltage switchgear, a 3-phase voltage transformer arrangement is typically derived by using three, single
phase transformer poles. Each pole consists of a single primary and secondary winding encapsulated in epoxy resin
and encased with insulating material. In most single phase pole designs, the primary winding has integrated fusing.
In a 3-phase arrangement, the primary windings of each individual pole are externally connected in star configuration.
Each end of the secondary winding is brought out to a customer termination box. The secondary windings can be
externally connected in star or delta configuration and must always be separately fused. Star connection of the
secondary winding is preferable, as this provides voltage stability through solid earthing of the neutral point and
3-phase and neutral is available for voltage measurement.
Switchgear installations use either fixed or withdrawable voltage transformers. Withdrawable voltage transformers
are mounted on a draw-out truck arrangement.
The power rating and accuracy of a transformer arrangement will depend on its application. For metering,
protection and indication, power ratings are small, with accuracies in the range of ±0.5-3.0%. A voltage transformer
used to provide a control supply may have a power rating above 5 kVA. In this case, accuracy is not as important.
Relevant standards: IEC 61869-3, IEEE C57.13.

Voltage transformer (3-phase, fixed) Control supply transformer (single phase, fixed)
1 1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
2

A F1 3.3 kV-R3 B a 110 VAC-R3

b l1 CPT
F1
P1 S1
A Ba b l2
4.2 kV/2A
3 2
A Ba b l3 F2
P2 S2
A B
4.2 kV/2A 3.31000
kV/110 VAC
VA
N
13765.A
13764.A

Mains supply Mains supply

3 x single phase VT poles 110 VAC secondary (external fusing required)
A Primary winding
B Secondary winding
3-phase and neutral, 110 VAC phase-to-phase
(external fusing required)
IEC ratings
The main standard applying to MV voltage transformers is 61869-3.

Nominal voltage
Example: 3.3 kV/110 VAC
Denotes a primary phase-to-phase voltage rating of 3300 V and
a secondary phase-to-phase voltage rating of 110 VAC.
13762.A

3300/110 VAC

Example: 3.3 kV-3/110-3 VAC

Denotes a primary phase-to-phase voltage rating of 3300 V and
phase-to-earth rating of 1905 V
(ie: 3300 x √3), and a secondary phase-to-phase voltage rating of
13763.A

110 VAC and phase-to-earth rating of 63.5 VAC (ie: 110 x √3) 3300- 3/110- 3 VAC

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 127

SWITCHGEAR

Many manufacturers use a continuous overload rating of 1.2 times the primary voltage rating without exceeding
thermal capabilities which can lead to winding and insulation failure.

Output power
This is the apparent output power rating of a transformer when nominal voltage is applied to the primary.
For a 3-phase voltage transformer Where:
arrangement, S = √3 x U x I S = apparent output power (VA)
U = secondary line voltage rating (V)
For a single phase voltage transformer I = secondary line current rating (A)
arrangement, S = U x I
Standard values are: 10, 15, 25, 30, 50, 75, 100, 120 VA
Control supply power transformers are usually single phase transformers, with an output power rating of 500 VA to
5000 VA. For further details, refer to Control power supply transformer sizing on page 128.

Accuracy class
Designates the maximum error of the transformed voltage and phase angles at rated primary voltage.
IEC 61869-3 specifies standard accuracy classes for voltage transformers.

Accuracy classes for metering applications

Class Application
Metering class 0.2 High accuracy applications (eg revenue metering)
Metering class 0.5 and 1.0 General use
Metering class 3.0 Rarely used

Accuracy classes for protection applications

Class Voltage error ±% Phase shift in minutes (60 minutes = 1 degree)
(between 0.5~1.5 x Up for earthed systems; (between 0.5~1.5 x Up for earthed systems; between
between 0.5~1.9 x Up for unearthed systems) 0.5~1.9 x Up for unearthed systems)
3P 3 120
6P 6 24
Control supply power transformer sizing
Sizing a control supply power transformer (CPT) requires analysis of the expected secondary load.
Information required:
 total inrush VA of the load
 total sealed VA of the load
 acceptable voltage drop level on the secondary of the transformer at inrush stage.
In most cases, the inrush period is 20 to 100 milliseconds. The power factor of the inrush current is assumed to be
0.4 (for other values, use the adjustment factor in the table below).
To select a CPT:
1. Determine the acceptable voltage drop on the secondary of the transformer at inrush stage. In the appropriate
voltage drop column, select an Inrush VA value larger than the calculated total inrush VA of the secondary load.
Note: the total inrush VA of the secondary load must include any resistive loading.
2. Find the corresponding transformer power rating, in the Nominal VA rating column.
3. Check that the Nominal VA rating value is larger than the calculated total sealed VA of the transformer
secondary load.
4. If the inrush VA power factor is different from 0.4, multiply the Nominal VA rating by the Power Factor
Adjustment factor.

Page 128 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

CPT selection - Inrush VA at selected voltage drop

Inrush VA Nominal VA rating
85% voltage drop 90% voltage drop 95% voltage drop
347 289 216 63
338 290 229 80
907 745 541 130
1267 1039 754 200
1394 1116 781 250
2870 2298 1584 350
3786 3013 2065 500
7360 5763 3786 750
7360 5763 3786 800
8837 6785 4329 1000
14921 11328 7070 1600
20500 14850 9100 2000

CPT selection - power factor adjustment factor

Power factor 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Adjustment factor 1.5 1.29 1.11 1.00 0.91 0.82 0.78 0.71 0.67 0.64

Exercise
A transformer with its primary connected to 7.2 kV, has a 110 VAC secondary with a total inrush loading of
850 VA and a resistive load of 100 VA. The total sealed VA of the load is 200 VA.
A voltage drop of 85% is acceptable during the inrush stage. The power factor of the inrush current is 0.3.
Calculate the necessary power rating of the control supply power transformer.
1. The total inrush loading is 950 VA (850 VA + 100 VA). The next highest Inrush VA figure in the 85% volt
drop column is 1267 VA.
2. An Inrush VA of 1267 VA equates to a Nominal VA rating of 200 VA.
3. 200 VA seems acceptable as this is equivalent to the total sealed load VA.
4. The inrush current has a power factor of 0.3. Using the power factor adjustment factor, the transformer has
a revised Nominal VA rating of 222 VA (200 x 1.11). The next highest standard size would be 250 VA.
Use a 7.2 kV/110 VAC, 250 VA single phase control supply power transformer.

Transformer primary fuses must withstand the inrush magnetising current which flows when a
transformer primary is switched on. With a medium voltage primary, E-rated fuses are used and often
selected to withstand 25 times the nominal primary current for 0.01 second and 12 times the nominal
primary current for 0.1 second.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 129

SWITCHGEAR

Motor Line Inductors on Soft Starter Applications

Long motor cables on the output of a soft starter are seen as a capacitive load which creates a di/dt current transient
at each SCR turn-on event. If the current transient repeatedly exceeds the di/dt rating of the SCR, failure will occur.

Soft starter start current waveform

300
1500
200
1000
100
500
0
0
63.05 63.10
-500

-1000

13766.A
-1500
55 59 63 67 71

The current transient, peak value and rate-of-rise are are installation dependent, and are determined by many factors
external to the soft starter. The di/dt value of the current transient is proportional to the system voltage (for
example, the value for a 6.6 kV system will be approximately twice as much as a 3.3 kV system).
At a critical cable length, the cable capacitance must be negated by line inductance to avoid damaging current
transients. Air-core line inductors are specified according to the installation and are fitted close to the soft starter
output terminals.
4
5

1 M
2 3

13768.A

3-phase supply Cable capacitance

Soft starter MV motor
Line inductors

Soft starter SCRs are most vulnerable to current transient damage at two stages of the motor starting procedure:
 in the initial ramp-up to the start current (current limit) level.
 when the SCRs reach full conduction and just before the motor current falls to the running current level.

The latter stage is potentially more damaging. AuCom medium voltage soft starters are bypassed in run state and
the SCRs are turned off, minimising the risk of current transient damage.

Current transient influences

The di/dt current transients that occur at SCR turn-on are influenced by the following factors:
 System voltage and frequency
 Total cable capacitance upstream and downstream of the soft starter
 Motor characteristics (kW, efficiency, starting power factor)
 Soft starter snubber component values (RC network components)
 Control stage of the motor start-up period
 Start current (current limit) level

Page 130 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Line inductor sizing

Various software tools and calculation methods are used to determine the inductance value required for a specific
soft starter application. In most cases, the required inductance per phase will be at least 100 µH. The required
inductance increases as the mains supply voltage increases.
The following rating information is usually provided with line inductors:
Voltage must be at least equal to system voltage
Frequency must equal system frequency
Current must at least equal motor FLC
Inductance (as calculated)

Sizing guidelines for AuCom MV soft starter applications

For AuCom MV soft starter installations with output motor cable runs exceeding 100 metres, compensation
inductance may be required. Consult AuCom for advice on these applications.
As a general guideline, compensation inductance required (per phase) can be calculated as:
Where:
LCOMP = compensation inductance per phase (µH)
Us = line supply voltage (V)
didt = SCR maximum didt rating (A/µs)

NOTE
This calculation involves many assumptions. Double the required compensation inductance before
selecting the output inductors.

Exercise:
Calculate the compensation inductance required for a 4.2 kV MVS soft starter installation. Assume the maximum
SCR didt rating to be 100 A/µs.

This calculation should be doubled to use a minimum compensation inductance of 102 µH per phase.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 131

SWITCHGEAR

Medium Voltage Surge Arrestors

Any system is designed with a maximum withstand voltage rating, and exceeding this rating will lead to catastrophic
failure. Overvoltage protection devices are used in medium voltage systems to protect electrical machinery, cables,
lines, etc against damage from overvoltage transients.
Overvoltage transients are caused by two main events:
 A lightning strike causes a very fast, high energy voltage transient. This can produce a 8/20 µs current
transient in the order of 1.5 to 20 kA, depending on the installation
 Equipment switching causes a medium level voltage transient. This can produce a 30/60 µs current
transient in the order of 125 to 1000 A, depending on the installation.

A protection device earths the current associated with an overvoltage transient. This limits the terminal voltage at
the point of installation to a level below the withstand voltage of the equipment.
5
Possible voltage without arrestors
Magnitude of overvoltage /p.u.

4
1 Withstand voltage of equipment

2
Voltage limited by arrestors
3
A Lightning overvoltages (microseconds)
2 3 B Switching overvoltages (milliseconds)
C Temporary overvoltages (seconds)
1 D Highest system voltage (continuous)
13802.A

0
A B C D
Duration of overvoltage

In the past, overvoltage protection was provided using spark-gap arrestors. Today,
most indoor medium voltage systems use metal-oxide (MO) arresters which provide
a compact and dependable solution for overvoltage protection. MO arresters are
covered by IEC 60099-4 and IEEE C62.22-2009. MO arresters are often used in gas
insulated, indoor switchgear to avoid restrike during equipment switching

Application and selection

MO arrestors are usually connected from each phase line to earth, at close proximity to the equipment being
protected. When the system voltage is within the normal operating range, the arrestor's resistance is high. At a
predetermined knee-point, the resistance reduces rapidly in response to rising voltage. This provides a low
resistance path for current to be diverted to earth. When this happens, a residual protection voltage (U res) appears
across the arrestor terminals. An MO arrestor is selected so that the lightning impulse-withstand voltage level (Up)
or BIL of the equipment is 1.4 times the residual protection voltage (U res) developed when maximum transient
current is flowing to earth.

2
Leakage current, Il (mA)
Line to earth peak voltage (kV)

Nominal discharge current, In (kA)

Continuous operating voltage, Uc (kV)
Rated voltage, Ur (kV)
5 Residual protection voltage, Ures (kV)
4
3
1
13803.A

Discharge current (A)

Page 132 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Selection Ratings
There are four ratings to consider when selecting MO arrestors for an installation.
Nominal discharge current (In)
Maximum discharge current the MO arrestor can shunt to earth, without exceeding its thermal and mechanical
limits. Manufacturers usually state two discharge current ratings:
 Current produced as a result of a lightning strike voltage transient. This discharge current is assumed to be
an 8/20 µs waveform with the following standard ratings:
1.5 kA, 2.5 kA, 5 kA, 10 kA, 20 kA
For the majority of secondary indoor switchgear systems, a rating of 10 kA is used for selection (sometimes
referred to as "distribution class")
 Current produced as a result of an equipment switching voltage transient. This discharge current is
assumed to be a 30/60 µs waveform with standard ratings from 125 A to 1000 A.
For the majority of secondary indoor switchgear systems, a rating of 500 A is used for selection (sometimes
referred to as "distribution class")
Continuous operating voltage (Uc)
This is based on the maximum-peak operating voltage likely to occur in the system when a single phase-to-earth fault
occurs. IEEE standards refer to this rating as MCOV (maximum continuous operating voltage).
For a solidly earthed neutral system:

For a high impedance or isolated earthed neutral system:

Uc ≥ U s
Where Us = system phase-to-phase line voltage (kV)
Rated voltage (Ur)
This rating is based on the thermal capabilities of the MO arrestor to endure short-term overvoltage transients
exceeding the continuous operating voltage limits.
For all types of earthed neutral systems:
Ur ≥ 1.25 x Uc
Residual protection voltage (Ures)
This is the voltage which appears across the MO arrester when it is shunting the maximum nominal discharge current
to ground. Using a safety margin, the residual protection voltage must be somewhat less than the lightning-impulse
withstand voltage rating (Up) of the equipment is it protecting.

Guideline for MO arrestor voltage ratings

Us Uc Ur Up Ures
System voltage Earthed Isolated Earthed Isolated Lightning Residual
(kV) neutral system earthed neutral system earthed impulse protection
(kV_min) neutral system (kV_min) neutral system withstand voltage
(kV_min) (kV_min) rating or BIL (kV_max)
(kV)
3.6 2.16 3.6 2.7 4.5 40 28
7.2 4.32 7.2 5.4 9 60 42
12 7.2 12 9 15 75 52
17.5 10.5 17.5 13 22 95 66
24 14.4 24 18 30 125 88
36 21.6 36 22 45 170 120

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 133

SWITCHGEAR

Exercise

A 17.5 kV secondary distribution, indoor switchgear system requires MO arrestors to be fitted on the incomer side.
The system supply is 15 kV/50 Hz and is isolated from earth. Use calculated ratings and the manufacturers’ data
sheet for selection.
The highlighted numbers 1~4 refer to the solution page.
Step 1: Calculate the MO arrestor ratings

 Continuous operating voltage

For an isolated earthed neutral system, continuous operating voltage (U c) ≥ system voltage (Us)
Uc ≥ 15 kV

 Rated voltage
Rated voltage (Ur) ≥ 1.25 times continuous operating voltage (Uc)
Ur ≥ 1.25 x 15
Ur ≥ 18.75 kV

 Nominal discharge current

For a secondary distribution system, use a lightning-impulse nominal discharge current rating (In) of 10 kA.

 Residual protection voltage

The residual protection voltage (Ures) developed across the MO arrester, when discharging 10 kA, must be
less than 70% of the equipment lightning-impulse rating (Up)
Ures  Up x 0.7
95 x 0.7
 66 kV
Step 2: Using the calculated ratings, select an MO arrestor from the manufacturer's data sheet

Page 134 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Solution:
A type MWD15 meets the selection criteria.

Source: example data based on ABB MWD surge arrestors

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 135

SWITCHGEAR

Power Factor Capacitors

Power factor correction (PFC) capacitor banks are used to improve the overall power factor of
a medium voltage distribution system or an individual installation.

13808.A

Bulk power factor correction

This is installed at the point of common coupling, which is typically on the main busbar system in a medium voltage
network.
If the loading on the network was constant, with a fixed inductance, bulk power factor correction could be of a fixed
value and permanently connected to the system. However, this is often not the case. Most network loading is
variable and if the bulk of the load is inductive, the amount of power factor correction required to maintain a target
power factor also needs to vary. This is achieved by using a master PFC controller, which monitors the system's
power factor and switches in nominal values of capacitance as needed to maintain a target value.

Circuit with bulk power factor correction

PFC controller

VT
1
CT
13807.A

M1 M2 M3
C1 C2 C3

Individual power factor correction

A very common method of maintaining a target power factor for a motor is to install an individual power factor bank
of fixed capacitance. The PFC bank is specifically sized for the motor installation and is switched in once the motor
has reached full speed. This method is often used on large motors running fully loaded for extended periods of
time.

Page 136 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Calculations: fixed capacitor bank for individual motor

To calculate the fixed capacitor bank power (Q) required to improve the power factor of an individual motor:
U = 6.6 kV
Q (kVAr)

1
2

13809.A
M Q
P (kW)
P = 1500 kW
 = 0.96
pf1 = 0.88 (initial power factor)
pf2 = 0.95 (target power factor)

Where:
Q = capacitor bank power (kVAr)
P = motor shaft power (kW)
Q= (tan tan 2)
1
 = motor efficiency at full load
1 = phase angle of motor power factor at full load (=cos-1 x pf1)
2 = phase angle of target power factor at full load (=cos-1 x pf2)

Required power is 325 kVAr

Calculations: PFC capacitor bank

To calculate the capacitor value (C) and nominal current value (Inom) for a power factor correction capacitor bank:
 Capacitance
Where:
C = capacitance (µF)
U2 (2 f) Q = capacitor bank power (kVAr)
U = supply voltage (kV)
f = supply frequency (Hz)

 Nominal current

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 137

SWITCHGEAR

Exercise
Calculate the total capacitance and nominal current of a 500 kVAr power factor bank operating on a 6.6 kV/50 Hz
supply system.
C = Q
1000
U2(2 f)
= 500
1000
6.62(2 50)
= 500 1000
43.56 314.16
= 36 µF
The capacitance is 36 µF.

The nominal current is 44 A.

Capacitor peak inrush current

When a capacitor bank is initially switched on, a large inrush current flows for several cycles, before settling down to
a steady nominal current value.
The peak value and duration of the inrush current is determined by:
 system voltage, U
 system short circuit power, Ssc
 capacitor bank power, Q
 number of back-to-back capacitor banks feeding back into the system

The values of peak inrush current and oscillation frequencies are typically in the order of a few kA at some 100 Hz
for a single capacitor bank, and a few 10 kA at some 100 kHz for multiple back-to-back capacitor banks.
Voltage switching transients
Capacitor bank switching produces oscillating voltage transients which are reflected back onto the network supply.
The severity of this phenomenon can be lessened by reducing the capacitor bank peak inrush current.

Capacitor bank switching transients

US Network voltage
1 Capacitor voltage
Capacitor current
Us Supply side overvoltage
UL Load side overvoltage
UL Inrush current
Ip
2 f Oscillation frequency

Ip

13810.A

Page 138 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Inrush reactors
IEC 60871-1 specifies that the peak inrush current of a capacitor bank must not exceed 100 times
its rated nominal current.
If this value is likely to be exceeded, extra inductive reactance must be installed in-line with the
capacitor bank. This not only reduces the peak inrush current, but also dampens the effect of
transient overvoltages which occur at switch-on.
Fuse pre-melt figures and the making capacity of associated switchgear need to account for the
expected peak inrush current.
13811.A

Inrush reactors are constructed of a primary coil encapsulated in a resin case. Classified as an air core inductor, they
are rated according to the following electrical characteristics:
 nominal voltage (kV) - must be equal to or greater than the system voltage
 nominal current (A) - must be equal to or greater than the capacitor bank nominal current
 inductance (µH)
Calculations: Re-rating a capacitor bank for specific voltage
To re-rate the power (Q) of a capacitor bank to match a specific system voltage:
Where:
Q1 = re-rated capacitor bank power at required system voltage
(kVAr)
Q2 = capacitor bank power at manufacturer's specified nominal
voltage (kVAr)
U1 = system voltage
U2 = capacitor bank nominal voltage

Exercise
A capacitor bank has a nominal power rating of 500 kVAr at 7.2 kV. Calculate the re-rated capacitor bank power
if used on a 6.6 kV system.
2
Q1 = Q2 × 1

2
= 500

= 500

The re-rated power at 6.6 kV is 420 kVAr.

NOTE
The capacitor bank nominal voltage rating is typically 1.2 times the system voltage, to protect against
transient and harmonic voltages. The capacitor bank power must be re-rated after selection.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 139

SWITCHGEAR

Calculations: peak inrush current of a fixed capacitor bank

To calculate the peak inrush current (Ip) of a fixed capacitor bank with no extra inrush reactance:

Strans = 5000 kVA

Z = 5%

U = 6.3 kV

Inom Ip

13812.A

Q = 250 kVAr

Step 1: Calculate capacitor bank nominal current, Inom

Q = capacitor bank power (kVAr)
U = system voltage (kV)

The capacitor bank's nominal current is 23 A.

Step 2: Calculate the short circuit power of the system, Ssc

Strans = transformer nominal power rating (kVA)
Z = transformer impedance (%)
Strans
SSC = × 100
Z
= 5000 × 100
5
= 100000 kVA
The system short circuit power is 100,000 kVA.

Step 3: Calculate the peak inrush current, I p

Inom = capacitor bank nominal current (A)
Ssc = transformer short circuit power (kVA)
Q = capacitor bank power (kVA)

The peak inrush current is 650 A.

To be suitable, the peak inrush current (Ip) must be less than 100 times the capacitor's nominal current (Inom).
Ip  100 x Inom
In this example, 650  100 x 23 A
This installation is acceptable.

Page 140 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Calculations: peak inrush current for multiple capacitor banks

To calculate the peak inrush current (Ip) of a number of capacitor banks with extra inrush reactance:

U = 6.3 kV

Inom Ip

L1 L2 L3 L4

13814.A
C1 C2 C3 C4

• capacitor banks C1, C2, C3, C4 are each rated for 900 kVAr at 7.2 kV.
• inrush reactance L1, L2, L3, L4 are each rated at 40 µH.

Step 1: Calculate the re-rated capacitor bank power (Q1) at system voltage (U1)
Q1 = re-rated capacitor bank power at required system voltage (kVAr)
Q2 = capacitor bank power at manufacturer's specified nominal voltage (kVAr)
U1 = system voltage
U2 = capacitor bank nominal voltage
Q1 U1
Q2 U2
 U1 
Q1 = Q2 ×
 U2 
 
= ×
 
900×0.766
689 kVAr
The re-rated power at 6.3 kV is 689 kVAr.

Step 2: Calculate the individual capacitance of each power bank

C = capacitance (µF)
Q = capacitor bank power (kVAr)
U = system voltage (kV)
f = system frequency (Hz)
Q
C = × 1000
U2 (2 50)
689
C1 = C2 = C3 = C4 = × 1000
6.32 (2 50)
= 689 × 1000
39.69 × 314.16
= 689 × 1000
12469.01
= 55.26 µF
The capacitance of each bank is 55 µF.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 141

SWITCHGEAR

Step 3: Calculate the equivalent capacitance of banks which are switched in (C eq)
Ceq =C2+C3+C4
= 55+55+55
165 µF
The equivalent capacitance is 165 µF.

Step 4: Calculate the equivalent inductance of banks which are switched in (Leq)
1
Leq = 1+ 1+ 1
L2 L3 L4

= 1
1+ 1+ 1
40 40 40

= 40
3
=13.3 µH
The equivalent inductance is 13.3 µH.

Step 5: Calculate the peak inrush current, I p

2 C1 × Ceq 1
Ip = U× × ×
3 C1 + Ceq L1 + Leq

2 55 × 165 1
= 6300 × × ×
3 55 + 165 40 + 13.3

2 9075 1
= 6300 × × ×
3 220 53.3
1
= 6300 × 0.67 × 41.25 ×
53.3

= 6300 × 0.67 × 41.25 × 0.019

= 6300 × 0.52
= 4543 A
The peak inrush current is 4543 A.
To be suitable, the peak inrush current (Ip) must be less than 100 times the capacitor's nominal
current: Ip  100 x Inom
Q
I nom =
3 ×U
689
=
3 × 6.3
689
=
10.91
= 63.15 A
In this example, 4543  100 x 63.15 A
This installation is acceptable.

NOTE
When selecting line fuses for upstream protection, the fuse pre-melt figure must be greater than the
capacitor bank's peak inrush current.
If using a circuit breaker for upstream protection, the circuit breaker's making capacity at rated voltage
must be at least equal to the capacitor bank's peak inrush current.

Page 142 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

4.5 Calculations
Transformer Calculations
Rated secondary current, Ir
A transformer's rated secondary current (Ir) is the maximum current it can supply before the output terminal voltage
starts to drop below its rated voltage (Ur). The rated secondary current can be calculated using the following
formula (assuming the applied primary voltage, U prim, is at its rated value).
Where
Ir = rated secondary current (A)
S = transformer power (kVA)
Ur = rated secondary voltage (kV)

Uprim (kV) Ur (kV)

13844.A
Ir (A)
S (kVA) Isc (A)
Z (%)
Short circuit current, Isc
Assuming the transformer is fed from an unlimited supply, the maximum short circuit current across the output
terminals (Isc) is determined by the impedance of the transformer (expressed as a percentage).
Percentage impedance (Z%) is calculated by shorting the output terminals of the transformer and increasing the
applied primary voltage (Uprim) from zero to a value where the rated current, Ir, flows through the secondary.
Percentage impedance is the ratio of applied primary voltage to rated primary voltage.
Example: If it takes 10% of the rated primary voltage to cause rated current to flow in the shorted secondary, the
percentage impedance Z=10%

Ir

A Short circuit
Uprim kV 1
Primary/secondary
13845.A
2
Z (%)

Where
Isc = transformer's maximum output short circuit current (A)
Ir = rated secondary current (A)
Z% = percentage impedance

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 143

SWITCHGEAR

The calculated short circuit current of a transformer, Isc is often used to rate the downstream distribution switchgear
it is feeding. In reality, the expected short circuit current at the switchgear installation will be less than the calculated
short circuit current, due to any impedance in the feeder circuit (ie impedance of feeder cables, switchgear, busbars
etc). All switchgear has a short-time withstand current rating (Ik), which is typically type tested for 3 seconds (tk).

Transformer
Ik > Isc
Switchgear installation

Isc
2

Ik
Q1 Q2 Q3

13847.A

Example
To calculate the short-time withstand current rating of the downstream switchgear, Ik, we must calculate the rated
secondary current and the short circuit current of the feeder transformer.
Transformer power S = 20 MVA
Secondary rated voltage Ur = 11 kV
Impedance Z% = 8%
Assume infinite power system.

Rated secondary current, Ir r

The transformer rated secondary current is 1050 A.

Short circuit current, Isc r

The transformer short circuit current is 13125 A.

Switchgear rating, Ik/tk Ik  Isc

Ik  13125 A
An appropriate switchgear rating is 16 kA / 3 seconds.

Page 144 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Terminal voltage drop

If a load draws more current than the transformer's rated secondary current (I-load > Ir), the transformer's output
voltage will drop from its rated value, Ur. The amount of voltage drop is determined by the internal impedance of
the transformer and the level of overload.
Voltage drop analysis is useful for determining the suitability of a transformer, when a motor is a large portion of the
load. It is recommended that the transformer output voltage should not drop more than 10% of its nominal value
when using a soft starter to start a motor.

U-int
Ir I-load
Load
Z-int
(Z%)
E Ur 1

13846.A
Where
Ir = rated secondary current (A)
S = transformer power (kVA)
Ur = rated secondary voltage (kV)
E = transformer internally generated EMF (kV)
Z% = percentage impedance (%)
Z-int = transformer internal impedance ()
U-int = internal voltage drop (kV)
I-load = load current (A)
Ur' = secondary output voltage due to overload (kV)

Example
Transformer power S = 30 MVA
Secondary rated voltage Ur = 6.6 kV
Impedance Z% = 10%
Assume infinite power system

Rated secondary current, Ir r

r

The rated secondary current is 2625 A.

Transformer internally generated EMF, E r

The internally generated EMF is 7.33 kV.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 145

SWITCHGEAR

Transformer internal impedance, Z-int

The internal impedance is 0.28 .

Exercise
Calculate the transformer's output terminal voltage drop if the load was drawing 6000 A (I-load).

Internal voltage drop, U-int I-load  Z-int

U-int 
1000
6000  0.28

1000
1680

1000
 1.68 kV

The internal voltage drop is 1.68 kV.

Secondary output voltage due to r'  E  U-int

overload, Ur'  7.33  1.68
 5.65 kV
The secondary output voltage is 5.65 kV.

Output voltage drop Ur  Ur'

The output voltage drop is 0.95 kV, or 14% Ur

Page 146 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Motor Calculations

FLC T N
Load
Ur M 1

13848.A
P_IN P_LOSS P_OUT

Where:
Input power P_IN P_IN = electrical input power (kW)
Output power P_OUT P_OUT = mechanical output shaft power (kW)
P_OUT P_LOSS = motor losses (kW), ie iron, copper,
magnetic, friction, windage losses
Motor losses P_LOSS Ur = motor rated supply voltage (kV)
P_LOSS f = nominal rated supply frequency (Hz)
Motor efficiency eff eff = motor full load efficiency (p.u.)
FLC = motor full load current (A)
Motor full load current FLC p.f. = motor full load power factor (p.u.)
N = motor full load speed (rpm)
Motor full load speed N Ns = motor synchronous speed (rpm)
Motor synchronous speed Ns poles = number of motor stator poles
T = full load motor shaft torque (Nm)
slip = motor slip at full load (p.u.)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 147

SWITCHGEAR

Exercise
For a motor running at full load, calculate the full load current, the total electrical input power and the amount of
full load slip, given that:
P_OUT = 2000 kW
Ur = 3.3 kV
f = 50 Hz
eff = 0.95
p.f. = 0.88
N = 1485 rpm
poles =4

Motor full load current

Input power P_IN  3Ur FLCp.f.

 33.34180.88
 2105 kW
(alternative calculation) P_OUT  P _IN  eff
P_
P _IN  OUT
eff
2000

0.95
 2105 kW
Motor slip at full load f  120
Ns 
poles
50  120

4
6000

4
 1500 rpm

N  Ns  1slip

N
 1 slip
Ns

N
slip  1
Ns
1485
 1
1500
 1 0.99
 0.01 p.u.

Page 148 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Busbar Calculations
Busbar calculations verify the thermal and electrodynamic design limits, and check that no resonance will occur.

Thermal withstand
Rated current, Ir (A)
The rating of a busbar system depends on the material, shape, size and configuration of the individual busbars, as well
as the operating conditions. The calculated busbar rating per phase must be greater than the maximum expected
operating current.

249
. × n
0.61
×S0.5× P0.39 Where
I =K × I = maximum allowable current per phase (A)
p20× 1+ 20 
K = total coefficient factor
e e  = maximum allowable busbar temperature (°C)
n = nominal ambient temperature (40 °C)
p20 = resistivity at 20 °C:
copper = 1.83  cm; aluminium = 2.90  cm
α = temperature coefficient of resistivity = 0.004
a P = busbar perimeter, 2(e+a) (cm)
S = busbar cross-section, e· a (cm2)
13857.A

The permitted busbar temperature rise is defined in IEC 62271-1.

Maximum permissible temperature rise for bolt-connected devices, including busbars

Material and dielectric medium Maximum permissible Temperature rise
temperature (°C) above 40 °C ambient
(°C)
Bolted connection (or equivalent)
Bare copper, bare copper alloy or bare aluminium alloy
In air 90 50
In sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) 115 75
In oil 100 60
Silver or nickel coated
In air 115 75
In sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) 115 75
In oil 100 60
Tin-coated
In air 105 65
In sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) 105 65
In oil 100 60
Source: derived from IEC 62271-1

NOTE
When engaging parts with different coatings, or where one part is of bare material, the permissible
temperature and temperature rise shall be those of the surface material having the lowest permitted
value.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 149

SWITCHGEAR

The total coefficient factor, K, is derived from six individual factors:

K = K1K2K3K4K5K6
 K1 is a function of the number of bars per phase and their shape:
The table below lists the value for K1, according to the shape ratio for the busbar system (e/a) and the number
of bars per phase.
Shape ratio e/a
0.05 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1.63 1.73 1.76 1.80 1.83 1.85 1.87 1.89 1.91
3 2.40 2.45 2.50 2.55 2.60 2.63 2.65 2.68 2.70

 K2 corresponds to the surface finish of the busbars:

Finish K2
bare 1
painted 1.15

 K3 is a function of the mounting arrangement:

Mounting K3
edge-mounted 1
one bar base-mounted 0.95
multiple bars base-mounted 0.75

 K4 is a function of the installed location:

Location K4
outdoors 1.2
indoors 1.0
enclosed 0.80

 K5 is a function of any artificial ventilation:

Ventilation K5
no ventilation 1
ventilation requires validation

 K6 is a function of the type of current:

The table below lists the value for K6 for an AC supply (50 Hz and 60 Hz), where the separation between
busbars is equal to the thickness of each bar.
Number of bars K6
1 1
2 1
3 0.98

Page 150 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Exercise
Check that the busbar rating (per phase) is greater than the required e=1 e=1
nominal rating of Ir = 2000 A. The busbar system is installed in an
enclosed duct.

Characteristics: two edge-mounted bare copper bars per phase.

Width = 8 cm, thickness = 1 cm, spacing = 1 cm. a=8

13858.A
K  K1 K2  K3  K4  K5  K6
 1.83  1 1 0.8  1 1
 1.464
24.9    n 
0.61
 S 0.5  P 0.39
I K
p20  1    20 
24.9  90  40 
0.61
 80.5  18 0.39
 1.464 
1.83  1 0.004  90  20 
24.9 10.87  2.83  3.09
 1.464 
1.83 1.28
2366.87
 1.464 
2.34
 1.464  1546.97
 2264.77 A
This system is adequate. I > Ir, 2265 A > 2000 A.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 151

SWITCHGEAR

Short-time withstand current, Ith (A)

The temperature rise during a short circuit needs to be calculated, assuming the current flows for the busbar's entire
rated short circuit duration, tk.
The total busbar temperature, T, is the calculated temperature rise during a short circuit period, sc, added to the
maximum allowable temperature of the busbar, .
T = sc + 
Short circuit temperature rise is calculated as:
Where
sc = temperature rise during a short circuit (°C)
p20 = resistivity at 20 °C:
copper = 1.83  cm; aluminium = 2.90  cm
Ith = Ik, short-time withstand current (kA)
tk = short-time withstand duration (s)
n = number of busbars per phase
S = busbar cross-section (cm2)
c = specific heat (°C):
copper = 0.091 kcal/kg°C; aluminium = 0.23 kcal/kg°C
 = density of metal:
copper = 8.9 g/cm3; aluminium = 2.7 g/cm3
 = maximum allowable temperature of the busbar (°C):
bare copper = 90 °C

Exercise
A busbar system has two copper bars per phase, with a short-time withstand rating of 31.5 kA for 3 seconds. Each
busbar is 8 cm wide and 1 cm deep. Calculate the total temperature of the busbar after a short circuit.
0.24  p20  Ith2  t k
sc 
n  S2  c 
0.24 1.83  31.52  3

2  82  0.091 8.9
0.24 1.83  992.25  3

256  0.091 8.9
1307.39

207.33
 6.31 °C

The short circuit temperature rise is 6.3 °C. The maximum allowable continuous temperature of the busbar
system is 90 °C. The potential total temperature after short circuit is 96.3 °C.
Insulator stand-offs and all other items in physical contact with the busbar must be able to withstand this
temperature.

Page 152 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Electrodynamic withstand

Electrodynamic forces
Busbars (parallel) Support
Ip Ip F1
h = e2
F

F1 H
F1 l

13873.A
d

13678.A
d

d Distance between phases (cm) H Insulator height

l Distance between insulators on a single phase h Distance from head of insulator to busbar
(cm) centre of gravity
F1 Force on busbar centre of gravity (daN) F Force on head of insulator stand-off (daN)
Ip Peak value of short circuit current (kA)
NOTE: 1 daN (dekanewton) is equal to 10 newtons.

Forces on parallel busbars

Maximum forces between parallel busbars occur as a result of the peak asymmetrical fault current (I p). The
maximum peak fault current can be calculated from the busbar system's short-time withstand rating (Ik).

Ip values for a system with 45 ms DC time constant

System frequency (Hz) Ip
50 2.5 x Ik
60 2.6 x Ik
When short circuit current flows in a busbar, the electrodynamic force exerted on a parallel busbar is:
Where:
Ip = maximum peak fault current (kA)
Ik = short-time withstand current (kA)

Forces on insulator stand-offs

Insulator stand-offs must also withstand the forces imparted on the parallel busbars during a short circuit fault.
Where:
F = force absorbed by head of insulator stand-off (daN)
F1 = force on busbar centre of gravity (daN)
The force absorbed at the head of each insulator stand-off is derived using a multiplication factor, Kn, according to the
total number of evenly-spaced insulator stand-offs per phase.

Multiplication factor Kn
Number of stand-offs 2 3 4 5
Multiplication factor Kn 0.5 1.25 1.10 1.14

The absorbed force per insulator stand-off (daN) is:

The bending resistance of an individual insulator stand-off must be greater than the calculated absorbed force, F´.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 153

SWITCHGEAR

Mechanical strength of busbars

The maximum allowable stress which a busbar can absorb, , is determined by the busbar material.
Where:
l = distance between insulator stand-offs on the same phase (cm)
V/I = inverse modulus of inertia for bars of the same phase (cm3)

Maximum allowable values for  for different busbar materials

Material Maximum  (daN/cm2)
Copper ¼ hard 1200
Copper ½ hard 2300
Copper 4/4 hard 3000
Aluminium 1200

Moment of inertia (I) and modulus of inertia (I/V) of busbars

100 x 10 80 x 10 80 x 6 80 x 5 80 x 3 50 x 10 50 x 8 50 x 6 50 x 5
S cm2 10 8 4.8 4 2.4 5 4 3 2.5
m Cu 0.089 0.071 0.043 0.036 0.021 0.044 0.036 0.027 0.022
(daN/cm) A5/L 0.027 0.022 0.013 0.011 0.006 0.014 0.011 0.008 0.007
x
I cm4 0.83 0.66 0.144 0.083 0.018 0.416 0.213 0.09 0.05
x' I/v cm3 1.66 1.33 0.48 0.33 0.12 0.83 0.53 0.3 0.2
x
I cm4 83.33 42.66 25.6 21.33 12.8 10.41 8.33 6.25 5.2
x' I/v cm3 16.66 10.66 6.4 5.33 3.2 4.16 3.33 2.5 2.08
x
I cm4 21.66 17.33 3.74 2.16 0.47 10.83 5.54 2.34 1.35
x' I/v cm3 14.45 11.55 4.16 2.88 1.04 7.22 4.62 2.6 1.8
x
I cm4 166.66 85.33 51.2 42.66 25.6 20.83 16.66 12.5 10.41
x' I/v cm3 33.33 21.33 12.8 10.66 6.4 8.33 6.66 5 4.16
x
I cm4 82.5 66 14.25 8.25 1.78 41.25 21.12 8.91 5.16
x' I/v cm3 33 26.4 9.5 6.6 2.38 16.5 10.56 5.94 4.13
x
I cm4 250 128 76.8 64 38.4 31.25 25 18.75 15.62

14009.A
x' I/v cm3 50 32 19.2 16 9.6 12.5 10 7.5 6.25

Source: Schneider Electric 2000.

Page 154 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Exercise

A busbar system has two end-mounted busbars per phase, 1 cm 1 cm

made of ¼ hard copper (maximum allowable stress of
1200 daN/cm2). Each bar is 8 cm high and 1 cm wide, with
8 cm
a gap of 1 cm between bars of the same phase. The phase 4 cm
centres are 15 cm and each phase has 6 insulator stand-offs
at 80 cm spacing. The insulator stand-offs are 15 cm high,
with a bending resistance of 1000 daN. 15 cm
Check that the busbars and insulator stand-offs are suitable

14011.A
for the installation.
15 cm 15 cm

Step 1: Calculate the forces between the parallel busbars of different phases.
Assume a short-time withstand current rating, Ik, of 31.5 kA at 50 Hz.
p k

2  78.752 10 2

 2  5.33  6201.5625 0.01

The force between busbars is 661 daN.

Step 2: Calculate the forces absorbed at the head of each insulator stand-off.

The force to be absorbed by each individual standoff:

The force imparted on each stand-off is 954 daN.

The imparted force is less than the bending resistance of the insulator stand-off: 954 < 1000 daN.
The insulators are suitable for the application.
Step 3: Calculate the maximum stress exerted on the busbars.
According to the selection table, the modulus of inertia, l / V, for 8 cm x 1 cm end-mounted copper busbar pairs
is 11.55 cm3.

 F1l 
V
12 I
66180 1
 
12 11.55
1
 4406.67 
11.55
 381.53 daN/cm2
The stress imparted on the busbars is 381 daN/cm2.
The imparted stress is less than the maximum allowable stress for ¼ hard copper busbars: 381 < 1200 daN/cm2.
The busbar dimensions and material are suitable for the application.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 155

SWITCHGEAR

Resonant frequency
The busbar system must be designed to avoid resonance at the nominal system frequency and twice this value. The
calculations should include some tolerance:
Where:
f = resonant frequency (Hz)
E = modulus of elasticity:
copper = 1.3 x 106 daN/cm2
aluminium = 0.67 x 106 daN/cm2
m = linear mass of busbar (daN/cm)
I = moment of inertia of the busbar cross-section, relative to the
perpendicular vibrating plane (cm4)
l = distance between insulator stand-offs of the same phase (cm)

Exercise
Verify the resonant frequency of the busbar system in the Exercise above.

The resonant frequency is well away from 50 Hz and 100 Hz. The busbar solution is suitable.

Short Circuit Calculations

Short circuit fault currents at different points on a system are determined by the power feeding into the fault and the
equivalent short circuit impedance seen by the fault.
Power sources feeding a fault include supply networks, transformers, generators and motors. Impedance is a vital
factor in limiting the level of short circuit current. Sources of impedance include all electrical machines, as well as
cables, overhead lines, busbars and switching apparatus.
There are numerous methods to calculate short circuit current levels, such as impedance, per-unit and
point-to-point. The most commonly used and widely understood is the impedance method (see below). These
calculation methods were widely used before calculation software became available. These programs allow very
accurate results to specific conformance standards.
Short circuit calculations serve two main functions:
 to determine the required make and break ratings of switchgear, and the mechanical withstand of all
equipment
 to inform fuse selection and protection relay settings, in order to achieve adequate circuit discriminations

Page 156 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Formulae
Short circuit

Where the short circuit power of a Where:

network, Ssc, is known: Isc = short circuit current (kA rms)
Ip = peak fault current (kA peak)
Ip = 2.5 x Isc (for a 50 Hz supply with a 45 ms DC time
Where the short circuit impedance of a constant)
network, Zsc, is known: Ip = 2.6 x Isc (for a 60 Hz supply with a 45 ms DC time
constant)
Zsc = total short circuit impedance ()
Ssc = short circuit power (MVA)
U = system voltage (kV)
Rsc = total short circuit resistance ()
Xsc = total short circuit reactance ()

NOTE
The switchgear “make rating” must be greater than the peak fault current, and the “break rating” must be
greater than the short circuit current..

Upstream network

Where:
Z = network short circuit impedance ()
Ssc = short circuit power (MVA)
U = system voltage (kV)
Reflecting the short circuit impedance of the upstream network through to the secondary of the transformer:
Where:
Zsc-sec = network short circuit impedance at the secondary of the
transformer ()
Zsc-prim = network short circuit impedance at the primary of the
transformer ()
Usec = transformer secondary voltage (kV)
Uprim = transformer primary voltage (kV)
The total impedance seen by a short circuit fault at the secondary terminals of the transformer is the sum of the
transformer impedance, Zsc-TR, and the short circuit network impedance at the transformer secondary (Zsc-sec).

Primary
1 Secondary

2
13849.A

Isc

Transformers

Where:
Zsc-TR = transformer output short circuit impedance ()
ZTR = transformer impedance ()
Usec = transformer secondary voltage (kV)
STR = transformer power (MVA)

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 157

SWITCHGEAR

Synchronous generator

Where:
Zsc-syn = synchronous machine short-circuit impedance ()
U 2 X
= syn  syn Xsyn = synchronous reactance (%)
Ssyn 100
Usyn = synchronous machine output voltage (kV)
Ssyn = synchronous machine output power (MVA)
A synchronous machine has three stages of reactance during a short-circuit fault. The reactance is lowest at the
beginning of a fault, causing the highest level of short circuit current. From this level, the short circuit current decays
to a steady state.
Subtransient stage
This is usually the first few cycles of a fault occurrence. The peak short circuit current at this stage determines the
fault “make rating” of a circuit breaker, and the mechanical withstand.
Transient stage
This stage typically lasts for 10 to 20 power cycles and determines the thermal withstand and “break rating” of a
circuit breaker.
Permanent stage
This is the short circuit current level until the fault is interrupted by protection and clearing of the fault. In reality, this
stage never occurs as the fault is cleared beforehand.

Stages of a short circuit

A B C D Point at which fault occurs

1 A Healthy
B Subtransient stage
Current

C Transient stage
D Permanent stage
13850.A

Ir Isc

Time

Transient levels for a synchronous generator

Type Subtransient Xd´´ Transient Xd´ Permanent Xd
Turbo 10%~20% 15%~25% 200%~350%
Exposed poles 15%~25% 25%~35% 70%~120%

Transient levels for a synchronous motor

Type Subtransient Xd´´ Transient Xd´ Permanent Xd
High speed > 1500 rpm 15% 25% 80%
Low speed < 1500 rpm 35% 50% 100%
Asynchronous motors

Where:
Zsc-mtr = motor output short circuit impedance ()
Umtr = motor input voltage (kV)
Pmtr = motor rated power (kW)
An asynchronous motor will contribute approximately 4 to 6 times its rated current into a short circuit fault.

Cables

Zsc = 0.1 /km

Busbars

Zsc = 0.15 /km

Page 158 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Impedance Method Calculations

Case 1
1 Source
Source (Network):
Up = 36 kV Feeder
Ssc = 1000 MVA G TR

Isc1
Transformer (TR):
CB1 CB2
Up = 36 kV
Us = 11 kV @ 50 Hz
S = 20 MVA
Z% = 10% 13851.A

Generator (G): CB3

U = 11 kV @ 50 Hz
S = 15 MVA Isc3

Xd´´ = 15%
Xd´ = 20%
2
For the purposes of this calculation, ignore all impedances of circuit breakers, cables and busbars.
The first step is to calculate the individual impedances.

Generator impedance (ZG): U2 Xd

Zd  
S 100
2
15
 11 
15 100
 1.21
The subtransient impedance is 1.2 .

U2 Xd
 
S 100
2
 11  20
15 100
 1.6
The transient impedance is 1.6 .
Transformer impedance (ZTR):

The permanent impedance is 0.6 .

Network impedance (ZNET), as seen on the
secondary side of the transformer:
362 11 2

1000 36

The permanent impedance is 0.12 .

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 159

SWITCHGEAR

Short circuit impedances and ratings of switchgear devices

Device Equivalent circuit Short circuit impedance Break rating Make rating
() (kA rms) (kA peak)
CB1
Transient stage

ZG
13852.A

Subtransient stage

CB2
ZNET

ZTR
13853.A

Isc2

CB3 Transient stage

ZNET ZG (ZNET ZTR)
ZG (ZNET ZTR)
ZG

ZTR

Subtransient stage
13854.A

Isc3

Case 2
1 Source
Feeder
Source (Network):
Up = 36 kV TR
Ssc = 1000 MVA
CB2
Transformer (TR):
Up = 36 kV
Us = 11 kV @ 50 Hz
S = 20 MVA
Z% = 10%
14006.A

CB1 CB3
Motor (M):
U = 11 kV @ 50 Hz Isc1
Isc3
P = 2000 kW
M
2
For the purposes of this calculation, ignore all impedances of circuit breakers, cables and busbars.
The first step is to calculate the individual impedances.

Page 160 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Motor impedance (ZM): 2

 U  200
P
2
 11  200
2000
 12.1
The motor impedance is 12.1 .
Transformer impedance (ZTR):

The permanent impedance is 0.6 .

Network impedance (ZNET), as seen on the
secondary side of the transformer:
362 11 2

1000 36

The permanent impedance is 0.12 .

Short circuit impedances and ratings of switchgear devices

Device Equivalent circuit Short circuit impedance Break rating Make rating
() (kA rms) (kA peak)
CB1

ZM
13928.A

CB2
ZNET

ZTR
13853.A

Isc2

CB3
ZNET
ZM (ZNET ZTR)
ZM
ZM (ZNET ZTR)
ZTR
13929.A

Isc3

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 161

SWITCHGEAR

4.6 Switchgear Inspection Checklists

These checklists outline the typical minimum electro-mechanical inspections, for a new switchgear installation.

Mechanical Inspection
Location:
Date:
Inspection staff:
Cubicle serial number:
Contract:
Description Passed Comments
(Y/N)
Eye bolts fitted
Explosion vent flaps: screws fitted, holes taped
Holes not used for arc duct: filled with fixings
LV doors: cutouts
LV doors: opening and closing
VCB doors: opening and closing
Cable compartment doors: opening and closing
Door locks
Racking label
VCB locking label
Danger labels (front and rear)
Cable compartment door: "unlocking" label
VCB compartment: padlocking mechanism fitted and
operating
Shutter operation
Shutter danger labels
Earth switch: interlock with VCB
Earth switch: interlock with solenoid (use 'N/A/ if not
fitted)
Earth switch: operation
Earth switch auxiliaries (check alignment and
operation)
VCB: test racking
VCB: mechanical interlock
VT: test racking
Busbar GPO3 bushing plates
Screw bushings horizontal busbar (small / large)
All internal copper work
Horizontal busbar copper work and joints
Earth bars
Earth bar links
Rear cover
Fixings for rear cover
Panel builder check sheets
Keys for all access doors
Earth switch handle
Standard VCB racking handle
Rear busbar chamber covers and fixings
Cubicle joining bolts supplied

Page 162 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Electrical Inspection

Location:
Date:
Inspection staff:
Cubicle serial number:
Contract:
Electrical schematic drawing number
Control voltages required for testing
Description Passed Comments
(Y/N)
LV door apparatus
Voltage indicators
Selector switches
Keys for selector switches (Fortress or other)
Pushbuttons
Indicators (colours)
Control device door labels (functions)
Device numbering (internal)
Terminal numbering
CT test block assemblies
VT test block assemblies
Check MCB ratings
Power supply ratings and operation
110 VAC distribution
220 VAC distribution
110 VDC distribution
24 VDC distribution
LV door earth link
Heaters and thermostats
Heater operation
Check CT rating plates
Earth connection at CTs
Check VT rating plates
Earth switch auxiliary labels
VT fuses fitted in fixed VTs
Test sheets: VCB
Test sheets: withdrawable VT
Test sheets: fixed VT
Solenoid for earth switch interlock (use 'N/A' if not
fitted)
Solenoid on cable compartment door (use 'N/A' if
not fitted)
Programming relays
Test control wiring and VCB operation
Voltage test on fixed VTs
Voltage test on withdrawable VTs
Bushings for holes between cubicles
Drawings as-built information
Inter-cubicle cabling marked and ready for To be done on site
termination

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 163

SWITCHGEAR

Commissioning Tools and Equipment (Typical)

 Crimp tool for VCB socket
 Terminal screwdriver (for LV terminals)
 Ferrule crimp tool
 Pin punch (removing sockets VCB plug)
 Multimeter
 Insulation tester
 Torch
 Scotch pad
 De-burring tool
 Wedges for cubicle alignment
 Plumb-bob and string
 Appropriate spanner and/or socket set
 Appropriate allen key set
 Appropriate screwdriver set
 Torque wrench
 Commissioning sheets
 Spare parts
 As built electrical and mechanical drawings

Page 164 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

4.7 Switchgear-Related IEC Standards

IEC Standard Title Supersedes old
Number standards
60044-1 Instrument transformers: Current transformers
60044-8 Instrument transformers: Electronic current transformers
60060-1 High voltage test techniques: General definitions and test requirements
60071-2 Insulation coordination: Application guide
60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
60909-0 Short-circuit currents in three-phase AC systems: Calculation of currents
61869-3 Instrument transformers: Additional requirements for inductive voltage 60044-2, 60186
transformers
62262 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment against
external mechanical impacts (IK Code)
62271-1 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Common specifications 60694
62271-100 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating current circuit-breakers 61633,
62271-308
62271-101 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Synthetic testing
62271-102 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating current disconnectors and 60129, 61128,
earthing switches 61129, 61259
62271-103 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV 60265-1
up to and including 52 kV
62271-104 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating current switches for rated
voltages of 52 kV and above
62271-105 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating current switch-fuse
combinations
62271-106 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating current contactors,
contactor-based controllers and motor-starters
62271-107 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating current fused
circuit-switchers for rated voltages above 1 kV up to and including 52 kV
62271-108 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: High-voltage alternating current
disconnecting circuit-breakers for rated voltages of 72.5 kV and above
62271-109 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating-current series capacitor
bypass switches
62271-110 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Inductive load switching
62271-111 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Overhead, pad-mounted, dry-vault,
and submersible automatic circuit reclosers and fault interrupters for alternating
current systems up to 38 kV
62271-200 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: AC metal-enclosed switchgear and
controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
62271-201 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: AC insulation-enclosed switchgear and
controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
62271-202 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: High-voltage/low voltage prefabricated
substation
62271-203 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Gas-insulated metal-enclosed
switchgear for rated voltages above 52 kV
62271-204 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Rigid gas-insulated transmission lines
for rated voltage above 52 kV
62271-205 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Compact switchgear assemblies for
rated voltages above 52 kV
62271-206 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Voltage presence indicating systems for 61958
rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
62271-207 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Seismic qualification for gas-insulated 62271-2
switchgear assemblies for rated voltages above 52 kV
62271-300 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Seismic qualification of alternating
current circuit-breakers
62271-301 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Dimensional standarisation of
high-voltage terminals

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 165

SWITCHGEAR

62271-302 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Alternating current circuit breakers
with intentionally non-simultaneous pole operation
62271-303 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Use and handling of sulphur 61634
hexafluoride (SF6)
62271-304 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Design classes for indoor enclosed 60932
switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and
including 52 kV to be used in severe climatic conditions
62271-305 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Capacitive current switching capability
of air-insulated disconnectors for rated voltages above 52 kV
62271-310 High voltage switchgear and controlgear: Electrical endurance testing for circuit
breakers above a rated voltage of 52 kV

NOTE
Edition dates have been deliberately omitted from the IEC Standard Number. When referring to a
standard, always ensure you are using the latest edition.

Page 166 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

4.8 Comparison of IEC and IEEE Standards

Although the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) is the main international organisation publishing
international standards relating to medium voltage switchgear, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) also publish standards.

IEC and IEEE have a cooperation agreement and some standards are jointly developed.
ANSI is the US representative to IEC.
In some cases, the requirements of similar standards from different organisations may conflict, or one standard may
include requirements not present in another standard.

NOTE
If equipment must comply with more than one standard, the requirements of each standard should be
individually checked.

Examples of differences in rating requirements

Similar standards may have differences in ratings specifications, design requirements and test procedures.

NOTE
This list gives some examples of differences between major standards. Always refer to the specific
standard(s) for full details.
 The standard value of rated duration for short-time withstand current is 1 second for IEC 62271-1, but
2 seconds for ANSI C37.20.3.
 The acceptable limits for temperature rise of busbars are more stringent in ANSI C37.20.3 than
IEC 62271-1.
 ANSI C37.20.3 stipulates design requirements (including materials, fusing and interlocking) that are not
present in IEC 62271.
 ANSI and IEC stipulate different testing requirements and procedures.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 167

SWITCHGEAR

4.9 IEC Switchgear Rating Definitions

IEC 62271-1 defines standard ratings for medium voltage switchgear. These ratings allow selection of equipment to
match the electrical characteristics at the point of installation.

Voltage
Operating voltage, U (kV)
This is the system's operating voltage at the point where the switchgear is installed. The operating voltage must
always be less than or equal to the rated voltage of the switchgear equipment.
Rated voltage, Ur (kV)
This is the maximum rms voltage the switchgear equipment can continuously operate at, under normal conditions.
The rated voltage is always higher than the systems operating voltage and determines the insulation levels of the
equipment.
Medium voltage, metal-enclosed switchgear is defined for use on operating voltages from1 kV to 52 kV. Within this
voltage range, IEC 62271-1 defines standard switchgear rated voltages as:
 Series I equipment (used in European 50 Hz installations): 3.6, 7.2, 12, 17.5, 24, 36, 52 kV
 Series II equipment (used in Non-European 60 Hz installations): 4.76, 8.25, 15, 15.5, 25.8, 27, 38, 48.3 kV

Insulation level voltages, Ud (kV rms 1 min) and Up (kV peak)

The defined levels are stated for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase limits under standardised ambient conditions.
For installations above 1000 metres, these insulation levels must be derated.
 Power frequency withstand voltage, Ud
This is the maximum rms voltage that the equipment can Ud
withstand at mains frequency for 1 minute. It simulates power
surges originated from within a power system from such events
as switching transients, resonance, etc. 13855.A

 Lightning impulse withstand voltage, Up Up

This is the peak transient voltage that the equipment can
withstand from power surges originating from atmospheric 0.5 Up

13856.A
conditions such as lightning. It is simulated using a standard
voltage waveform 1.2 µs 50 µs

Standard values for insulation level voltages

Ur (kV) Ud (kV rms) Up (kV peak)
7.2 20 60
12 28 75
17.5 38 95
24 50 125
36 70 170

Current
Operating current, I (A)
This is the maximum rms current expected to flow through the equipment. The operating current must always be
less than or equal to the rated current of the equipment.
Rated current, Ir (A)
This is the maximum rms current the equipment can continuously operate at, under normal conditions. This rating
is based on an ambient operating temperature of 40°C, within an allowable maximum temperature rise. For
temperatures above 40°C, switchgear rated current must be derated.
IEC 62271-1 specifies standard ratings as base 10 multiples of 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3.15, 4, 5, 6.3, 8

Page 168 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

Maximum permissible temperature rise

Material and dielectric medium Maximum permissible Temperature rise above
temperature (°C) 40 °C ambient (°C)
Contacts, in air
Bare copper, bare copper alloy or bare aluminium alloy 75 35
Silver or nickel coated 105 65
Tin-coated 90 50
Bolted connection (or equivalent), in air
Bare copper, bare copper alloy or bare aluminium alloy 90 50
Silver or nickel coated 115 75
Tin-coated 105 65
Source: derived from IEC 62271-1
Peak withstand current, Ip (kA)
This is the peak current the equipment can withstand in the closed position from the first loop of a short circuit fault.
This current contains a symmetrical AC component, superimposed on a decaying DC component. Peak withstand
current is defined as 2.5 times the rated short-time withstand current for 50 Hz installations and 2.6 times the rated
short-time withstand current for 60 Hz installations.
The switchgear peak withstand current rating must be higher than the calculated peak dynamic current (I dyn)
expected if a short circuit fault occurred at the point of installation.

NOTE
Switchgear peak withstand current rating is commonly referred to as rated short circuit making capacity.

Peak withstand current

AC component
1
DC component
2

Ip = 2.5 x Ik
(f = 50 Hz)
2 x Ik
Fault current (kA)

13936.A

45 ms
Time (ms)

Short-time withstand current, Ik (kA)

This is the level of symmetrical rms fault current the switchgear can carry in the closed position for a short time
period (typically 1 second), without temperature rise exceeding predefined levels.
IEC 62271-1 specifies standard ratings as base 10 multiples of 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3.15, 4, 5, 6.3, 8
Short-time withstand duration, tk (seconds)
This is the period of time that the equipment is rated to carry the short-time withstand current.
IEC 62271-1 specifies a standard rating of 1 second, although durations of 0.5, 2 and 3 seconds are allowed.
Frequency, fr (Hz)
This is the rated test frequency of the switchgear and must match the operating frequency of the installation. Two
medium voltage mains supply frequencies are used globally:
 50 Hz in European systems
 60 Hz in American systems

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 169

SWITCHGEAR

4.10 Protection index

IP Ratings
IEC 60529 specifies levels of protection against the ingress of different items. Ingress protection (IP) codes are
composed of up to four elements:
 Characteristic 1: Solid foreign objects
 Characteristic 2: Harmful ingress of liquid
 Additional letter (optional): Object used for access
 Supplementary letter (optional): Application specific

IP rating components
Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Additional Letter Supplementary Letter
0 Non-protected Non-protected A = back of hand H = high voltage apparatus
1 ≥ 50 mm diameter Vertically dripping B = finger M = motion during water test
2 ≥ 12.5 mm diameter Dripping at 15 ° tilt C = tool S = stationary during water test
3 ≥ 2.5 mm diameter Spraying D = wire W = weather conditions
4 ≥ 1.0 mm diameter Splashing
5 Dust-protected Jetting
6 Dust-tight Powerful jet
7 Temporary immersion
8 Continuous immersion
Source: IEC 60529
IEC 62271-1 specifies protection ratings for enclosures. Equipment designed for indoor installation is not typically
IP rated against ingress of water (a placeholder X is used instead of a rating for this characteristic):

IP ratings for equipment installed indoors

Degree of Protection against ingress of solid foreign Protection against access to hazardous parts
Protection objects
IP1XB Protected against solid objects greater than 50 Access with a finger (test-finger 12 mm
mm diameter, 80 mm length)
IP2X Protected against solid objects greater than 12.5 Access with a finger (test-finger 12 mm
mm diameter, 80 mm length)
IP2XC Protected against solid objects greater than 12.5 Access with a tool (test rod 2.5 mm diameter,
mm 100 mm length)
IP2XD Protected against solid objects greater than 12.5 Access with a wire (test wire 1.0 mm diameter,
mm 100 mm length)
IP3XC Protected against solid objects greater than 2.5 Access with a tool (test rod 2.5 mm diameter,
mm 100 mm length)
IP3XD Protected against solid objects greater than 2.5 Access with a wire (test wire 1.0 mm diameter,
mm 100 mm length)
IP4X Protected against solid objects greater than 1 Access with a wire (test wire 1.0 mm diameter,
mm 100 mm length)
IP5X Protection against harmful entry of dust Access with a wire (test wire 1.0 mm diameter,
100 mm length)
Source: IEC 62271-1

Page 170 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SWITCHGEAR

NEMA Ratings
NEMA 250 is a product standard that addresses many aspects of enclosure design and performance.
NEMA Protection against solid objects Closest IP equivalent *
1 Indoor, protection from contact. IP 20
2 Indoor, limited protection from dirt and water. IP 22
3 Outdoor, some protection from rain, sleet, windblown dust and ice. IP 55
3R Outdoor, some protection from rain, sleet and ice. IP 24
4 Indoor or outdoor, some protection from windblown dust, rain, splashing IP 66
water, hose-directed water and ice.
4X Indoor or outdoor, some protection from corrosion, windblown dust, IP 66
rain, splashing water, hose-directed water and ice.
6 Indoor or outdoor, some protection from ice, hose-directed water, entry IP 67
of water when submerged at limited depth.
12 Indoor, protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive IP 54
liquids.
13 Indoor, protection from dust, spraying water, oil and non-corrosive liquids. IP 54
NOTE
* NEMA and IP ratings are not directly equivalent and this information provides an approximate correlation only.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 171

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5 Schematic Diagrams
5.1 Electrical Symbols - Common Switching Functions
The following table shows the standard IEC and ANSI symbols for common switching functions

IEC 60617-2 is a European standard. ANSI Y32.2 is a North American standard. As a general rule,
countries using a 50 Hz supply normally adhere to IEC standards and countries using a 60 Hz supply
normally adhere to ANSI standards.

Designation and Symbol (ANSI) Function Switches operating Switches fault

symbol (IEC) current current
Disconnector Isolates

Earthing disconnector Earths (short circuit making

capacity)
Switch Switches

Disconnector switch Switches and isolates

Fixed circuit breaker Switches and protects

Withdrawable circuit Switches and

breaker protects; isolates if
withdrawn
Fixed contactor Switches

Withdrawable Switches; isolates if

contactor withdrawn

Fuse Protects but does not

isolate (once)

Page 172 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5.2 Circuit Breaker Control (Typical)

This information focuses on the double command operated (DCO) method of circuit breaker control.
DCO control uses normally-open momentary contacts (ie pushbuttons) or a bistable relay to operate the shunt
closing and opening coils. Some circuit breakers use voltage fed open and close command signals while others use
volt-free signals.
Medium voltage circuit breakers can be vacuum or gas (SF6) insulated, with magnetic or motor charged spring
operation.
Here are some examples of various double command operated (DCO) control methods:

Motor operated circuit breaker using voltage fed open and close command signals via momentary contact
pushbuttons

Auxiliary supply
6
Motor (spring charge)
1
Close shunt coil
5
Open shunt coil
MS MC MO Circuit breaker controller

14040.A
External trip contact (eg from MPR)

2 3 4

Magnetic operated circuit breaker using volt-free open and close command signals via bistable relay contacts

Auxiliary supply
S1 KA1 Circuit breaker control (open/close)
4 Circuit breaker controller
Q1-1 Q1-2 External trip contact (eg from MPR)
A Control supply
1 B Command inputs (common, close,
open)
A B
3

KA1

14041.A
2

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 173

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5.3 Contactor Control (Typical)

Medium voltage contactors have two methods of control.
 single command operated control (SCO) - this requires a permanent signal to close and maintain the
contactor in the closed position. Removal of the control signal will open the contactor.
 double command operated control (DCO) - this requires two separate momentary contacts; one for the
close command and one for the open command. The DCO control method typically uses normally open,
spring return pushbuttons for both the open and close commands.

Typically, command signals require an external voltage source and the contactor controller itself requires a separate
auxiliary voltage source. Depending on the contactor make and model, electrical options are available. Some
examples are:
Undervoltage shunt trip only used with DCO control
Lock-out solenoid needs to be externally energised before contactor main poles can be electrically
operated
Racking solenoid needs to be externally energised before a withdrawable contactor can be moved
between the test and service positions
Auxiliary contacts indicate the electrical state of the main contactor poles
Racking contacts indicate whether a withdrawable contactor is in the service or test position
Fuse blow indicator contacts indicate fuse condition. - operated by striker pin and only available on contactors
with integral medium voltage fuses

The following examples show typical contactor control circuits:

Single command operated contactor control (typical)

Auxiliary supply

KA1
Contactor controller
3
Control signal (maintained)

4 External trip contact (eg from MPR)

1 A Control supply
B Control input
2

A B
14042.A

Double command operated contactor control (typical)

Auxiliary supply
3
Contactor controller
1
External trip contact (eg from MPR)
2
A Control supply
B Close input
A B C C Open input
14043.A

Page 174 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5.4 Automatic Changeover Systems

In medium voltage distribution networks, it is important to maintain a high level of reliability. Industry relies on the
continuous operation of critical plant, which requires no or little disruption to the electrical supply. There are
various methods for building redundancy of supply into a system. The most commonly used methods are a dual
transformer fed supply and/or a standby generator sized to keep critical plant online.
Automatic changeover systems are designed to monitor and maintain continuous supply. Today's technology
allows the supervision and control of an entire distribution system from a single controller, referred to as an
automatic transfer switch (ATS) or automatic changeover unit (ACU). Although there are a wide range of
products available, they all have the same primary function.
The equipment monitors 3-phase voltages on all power sources. Power supply sources are often prioritised and if
any phase voltage on the primary power source falls outside a predetermined range for a specific amount of time,
the power source is switched over to a back-up supply. Once the primary power source is re-established, the
power source is switched back to the primary power source. In medium voltage systems, switching is performed
using either contactors or circuit breakers. Most ATS controllers can control both types of switching devices.
Automatic changeover systems range from simple main/standby set-ups to highly complex distribution systems and
this is where the selection of an appropriate ATS controller is important. Systems can be operated in automatic or
manual mode.
 In AUTO mode, supervision and power source switching is carried out entirely by the ATS controller.
 In MANUAL mode, power source switching is carried out by manual selection via the ATS controller.

NOTE
For safety reasons, manual mode cannot be used in certain network configurations.

Overview
The following are examples of common operating modes in automatic changeover systems. Most ATS controllers
can be programmed to operate in any one of these modes.

N1+N2

N1 N2

K1 K2
14044.A

DB

AUTO mode with line priority:

N1 is the prioritised power source and, if healthy, will always supply the receiving network (DB). If N1 is lost, the
controller switches over to power source N2. The controller switches back to N1 once it has been re-established.
AUTO mode without line priority:
The first power source verified as healthy will supply the receiving network (DB). If this power source is lost, the
other power source will be selected and remain as the supply as long as it is healthy. If both power sources are lost,
both sources N1 and N2 are isolated from the receiving network (DB)
MANUAL mode:
Select N1 or N2 as the power source

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 175

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

N1+G

N1 G

K1 K3

14045.A
DB

AUTO mode:
N1 is the prioritised power source and, if healthy, will always supply the receiving network (DB). If power source
N1 is lost, the controller commands the standby generator to start. Once the generator is at correct voltage and
frequency, power source G is switched in to supply the receiving network (DB). The controller switches back to
N1 once it has been re-established.
MANUAL mode:
Select N1 or G as the power source.

N1+N2+N3

N1 N2 N3

K1 K2 K3
14046.A

DB

AUTO mode with line priority:

N1 is the prioritised power source and, if healthy, will always supply the receiving network (DB). If N1 is lost, the
controller switches over to power source N2. If power source N2 is lost, the controller switches over to power
source N3. The controller switches back to N1 once it has been re-established.
AUTO mode without line priority:
The first power source verified as healthy will supply the receiving network (DB). If this power source is lost, the
next healthy power source is selected and will remain as the supply as long as it is healthy. The order of power
source selection is normally predetermined, eg N1 then N2 then N3.
MANUAL mode:
Select N1 or N2 or N3 as the power source.

Page 176 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

N1+N2+G

N1 N2 G

K1 K2 K3

14047.A
DB

AUTO mode with line priority:

N1 is the prioritised power source and, if healthy, will always supply the receiving network (DB). If N1 is lost, the
controller switches over to power source N2. The controller switches back to N1 once it has been re-established.
If both power sources N1 and N2 are lost, the controller commands the standby generator to start. Once the
generator is at correct voltage and frequency, power source G is switched in to supply the receiving network (DB).
The controller switches back to the first re-established power source N1 or N2.
AUTO mode without line priority:
The first power source verified as healthy will supply the receiving network (DB). If this power source is lost, the
other power source will be selected and remain as the supply as long as it is healthy.
If both power sources N1 and N2 are lost, the controller commands the standby generator to start. Once the
generator is at correct voltage and frequency, power source G is switched in to supply the receiving network (DB).
The controller switches back to the first re-established power source N1 or N2.
MANUAL mode:
Select N1 or N2 or G as the power source.

N1+N2+S

N1 N2

K1 K2

S
14048.A

DB1 DB2

AUTO mode:
Providing power sources N1 and N2 are healthy, N1 will supply network DB1 and N2 will supply network DB2.
Bus coupler S will remain open.
If power source N1 is lost, this supply is isolated and bus coupler S is closed. Power source N2 now supplies
networks DB1 and DB2. Once power source N1 is re-established, bus coupler S is opened and N1 will supply
network DB1 and N2 will supply network DB2.
If power source N2 is lost, this supply is isolated and bus coupler S is closed. Power source N1 now supplies
networks DB1 and DB2. Once power source N2 is re-established, bus coupler S is opened and N1 will supply
network DB1 and N2 will supply network DB2.
MANUAL mode:
Select N1 and N2 as power sources with bus coupler S open.
Select power source N1 with bus coupler S closed and power source N2 isolated.
Select power source N2 with bus coupler S closed and power source N1 isolated.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 177

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5.5 MVS Schematic Diagrams

The MVS medium voltage soft starter is rated for 80 A to 321 A at 2.3 kV to 7.2 kV. AuCom can supply the soft
starter in an IP54 or IP42 style panel with two switchgear configurations. These are referred to as E3 and E2 panel
options.

E3 panel option
The standard E3 panel option consists of a combined main isolator/earth switch, a main and bypass contactor and a
set of MV fast-acting line fuses (R-rated). Refer to the MVS section for details of optional panel equipment.
The panel can be supplied in a stand-alone format or with rear, horizontal busbars for an MCC switchgear line-up.

Typical MVS E3 panel

2
Q1
L1A L1
2 F1 1 T1
L1B
L2A L2
2 F2 1 T2
L2B
F3 L3A L3 1
2 1 T3
L3B
E

K1
2 1

4 3

6 5

3 A1
U1 T1 T1 L1
M1
T1B
M V1 T2 T2 L2
3 T2B
W1 T3 T3 L3
T3B

K2
2 1

4 3

6 5
14049.A

Mains supply F1-3 MV protection fuses

MVS E3 panel K1 Main contactor
Motor cables K2 Bypass contactor
A1 MVS soft starter Q1 Isolator/earth switch

Page 178 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

E2 panel option
The standard E2 panel option consists of a main and bypass contactor. A means of isolation and earthing, as well
as some form of line protection, must be supplied and installed separately, upstream of the E2 panel. Refer to the
MVS section for details of optional panel equipment.

Typical MVS E2 panel

L1

L2

L3
1
E

K1
2 1

4 3

6 5

3 A1
U1 T1 T1 L1
M1
T1B
M V1 T2 T2 L2
3 T2B
W1 T3 T3 L3
T3B

K2
2 1

4 3

6 5
14050.A

Mains supply A1 MVS soft starter

MVS E2 panel K1 Main contactor
Motor cables K2 Bypass contactor

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 179

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5.6 MVX Schematic Diagrams

The MVX medium voltage soft starter is rated up to 200 A at 11 kV. AuCom supplies the soft starter in an IP4X
metal-clad style panel with two switchgear configurations. These are referred to as the contactor or circuit breaker
panel options.

Contactor panel option

This panel option is limited by the contactor fuse rating to a maximum motor FLC of 160 A. It consists of a
withdrawable, fused contactor as a main switching device, a fixed bypass contactor, overvoltage MOVs on the line
side and an earth switch on the motor side. Refer to the MVX section for details of optional panel equipment.
The panel can be supplied as a stand-alone format or with an upper, horizontal busbar system for an MCC
switchgear line-up.

Typical MVX contactor panel

2
CT1 2 1
CT2 4 3
CT3 6 5 1
(F1-3)

2 1
4 3
6 5

3
14051.A

Three-phase supply F1-3 MV protection fuses (x3)

MVX contactor panel K1 Main contactor (withdrawable, fused)
Motor cables K2 Bypass contactor (fixed)
A1 MVX soft starter Q3 Earth switch
CT1-3 Current transformers U1-3 Overvoltage MOVs

Page 180 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

Circuit breaker panel option

This panel option is currently supplied for a maximum motor FLC of 400 A. It consists of a withdrawable circuit
breaker as a main switching device, a separate motor protection relay (MPR), a fixed bypass circuit breaker,
overvoltage MOVs on the line side and an earth switch on the motor side. Refer to the MVX section for details of
optional panel equipment.
The panel can be supplied as a stand-alone format or with an upper, horizontal busbar system for an MCC
switchgear line-up.

Typical MVX circuit breaker panel

2
CT1 Q1
2 1 L1
CT2 4 3 L2
CT3 1
6 5 L3
E

Q2
2 1
4 3
6 5

A1

L1 T1
L2 T2
L3 T3

U3 U2 U1

M1 3
T1
M T2
3
T3

Q3
14052.A

Three-phase supply Q1 Main circuit breaker (withdrawable)

MVX circuit breaker panel Q2 Bypass circuit breaker (fixed)
Motor cables Q3 Earth switch
A1 MVX soft starter U1-3 Overvoltage MOVs
CT1-3 Current transformers

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 181

RESOURCES

6 Resources

6.1 Equipment Specifications

The following soft starter and power factor panel specifications provide detail of AuCom supplied equipment. The
switchgear specification is more generic. These specifications can be used entirely or in part when tendering for a
project.

NOTE
AuCom reserves the right to modify or change the specification of its products at any time without
notice.

Page 182 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 SPECIFICATION:

MVS Solid State

Reduced Voltage Motor Starter

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
 CONTENTS

Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................2
1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Supplier Qualifications..................................................................................... 2

Environmental Specifications .........................................................................................................3

2.1 Environmental Specifications .......................................................................... 3
2.2 Physical Specifications .................................................................................... 3
2.3 Safety .............................................................................................................. 3

Logic Control Configuration ...........................................................................................................4

3.1 Control Interface .............................................................................................. 4
3.2 Operating Configurations ................................................................................ 5
3.3 Motor and System Protection Features........................................................... 5
3.4 Programmable Relay Outputs ......................................................................... 6
3.5 Programmable Control Inputs ......................................................................... 6
3.6 Metering and Performance Monitoring ............................................................ 7
3.7 Remote Communications ................................................................................ 7

Support and Services ......................................................................................................................8

4.1 Commissioning ................................................................................................ 8
4.2 Documentation ................................................................................................ 8
4.3 Training............................................................................................................ 8
4.4 Warranty and Repair ....................................................................................... 8
4.5 Standards and Approvals ................................................................................ 8

1
INTRODUCTION

Introduction
1.

1.1 Scope
This document specifies the minimum requirements for a solid state reduced
voltage motor starter for medium voltage application.

This specification is intended as a guideline for suppliers wishing to supply their

product to <customer name> for their <project name/outline of requirement>.

The solid state reduced voltage starter shall control three phases at ____ V,
___ Hz and shall be rated to suit the application and motor characteristics. Where
possible motor and load curves will be provided and the supplier will use this data
to justify selection. The starter shall provide soft starting and soft stopping of the
motor as required.

1.2 Supplier Qualifications

The equipment shall have been manufactured by a single vendor.

The manufacturer shall be certified under ISO9000.

The manufacturer shall have produced solid state reduced voltage starters for a
minimum of 20 years.

2
 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Environmental Specifications

2.

2.1 Environmental Specifications

The equipment shall be suitable for storage at temperatures from -25 ºC to +55 ºC.

The equipment shall be suitable for use at temperatures from -10 ºC to +60 ºC.

The equipment shall be suitable for use at temperatures up to 40 ºC without

derating.

The equipment shall be suitable for operation at altitudes up to 1000 m above sea
level without derating.

The equipment shall be suitable for use in environments with relative humidity
between 5% and 95% (non-condensing).

2.2 Physical Specifications

The equipment shall be suitable for supply in IP00 format or integrated into a
stand-alone package.

The equipment shall be modular in design and construction.

The thyristor assembly for each phase shall consist of a discrete module, and be
individually replaceable

Replacement of a thyristor assembly by a qualified service technician shall not take

longer than 10 minutes.

No single module of the equipment shall exceed 80 kg in weight.

The integrated starter must be enclosed up to IP54 and include:

• Line contactor
• Bypass contactor
• Line fuses (optional)
• A pad-lockable earthing Isolator (optional)

2.3 Safety
The equipment shall employ only air insulation between phases.

The IP00 starter should be capable of being enclosed without any additional
clearances at the side of the product.

The equipment shall employ fibre-optic cabling to ensure complete isolation

between low voltage and high voltage circuitry.

The equipment shall provide means to safely test its correct installation:
• The equipment shall provide a means to test the installation using a low
voltage motor.
• The equipment shall provide a means to test operation of all control circuitry
and protection mechanisms, without connection to medium voltage. Functions
to be tested include, at minimum:
• motor starting
• motor stopping
• protection activation

3
LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

Logic Control Configuration

3.

3.1 Control Interface

The equipment shall be suitable for being supplied as a loose item with an IP00
unit for flush mounting into the control portion of a cubicle.

The controller must have a minimum environmental rating of IP55.

The user interface shall comprise, at minimum:

• an LCD screen for information feedback
• be able to be multilingual
• status LEDs indicating
• motor state
• starter control state
• trip status
• output relay activity
• local pushbuttons to control:
• motor start
• motor stop
• starter reset
• menu access
• parameter configuration
Remote control of the starter shall be possible using either two or three wire
control.

Have multi level password protection system, to prevent unauthorized parameter

access; but still allowing access for operators to metering functions and logs.

All terminals shall be of the pluggable type.

The control interface shall provide a means for an operator to quickly access and
configure parameters.

The control interface shall provide an operator with a short list of critical
parameters for common applications, including:
• pump
• fan
• compressor
• generic
The equipment shall permit the operator to save the current configuration to an
internal file. There shall be two files available.

The equipment shall permit the operator to reload a previously saved configuration
set from an internal file. There shall be two files available.

The equipment shall permit the operator to restore default settings.

The equipment shall support remote management via a control network with a
choice of Modbus, Profibus and Devicenet as a minimum.

The equipment shall provide an on-board real-time clock; but failure of this clock
due to low battery shall not trip the starter.

4
 LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

3.2 Operating Configurations

The equipment shall permit the user to select between multiple profiles for starting
the motor.

The equipment shall provide a kickstart option for starting the motor.

The equipment shall permit the user to select between multiple profiles for stopping
the motor.

The equipment shall provide a feedback ramp option for stopping the motor.

The equipment shall provide a means of automatically stopping the motor at a

predetermined time or after a predetermined period of operation.

The equipment shall be suitable for use with dual-speed and slip-ring motors

Thermal modeling that allows the soft starter to dynamically calculate the motor
temperature, predict the motors available thermal capacity, to predict whether the
motor can successfully complete a start.

3.3 Motor and System Protection Features

The starter shall have the following adjustable protection functions included as
standard. (ANSI Codes):

The equipment's sensitivity and response for protection functions shall be

programmable.
 Overload (49/51)
 Undercurrent (37)
 Instantaneous Over-current (50)
 Current Imbalance (46)
 Frequency (81)
 Auxiliary Trip A (86/97)
 Auxiliary Trip B (86/97)
 Excess start time (66)
 Maximum start Time (48)
 Starter Communications Failure (3)
 Battery/Clock Failure (3)
 SCR Temperature
 Ground Fault (50G)
 Overvoltage (59)
 Under-voltage (27)
 Phase sequence (47)
 Phase Loss (47)
 Power Loss (32)
The following protection states are also provided:
• Motor not detected
• Auxiliary trip A
• Auxiliary trip B
• Network communications
• EEPROM failure
• Gate drive failure
• Conduction 1 invalid
• Conduction 2 invalid
• Conduction 3 invalid
• Assembly control voltage low

5
LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

The equipment's possible responses to protection activation shall include, at

minimum:
• trip: cease operation and disable the motor
• warn: notify the condition to the operator and continue operating
• ride through: write the event to memory

3.4 Programmable Relay Outputs

The equipment shall provide output relays to control operation of:
• main contactor
• bypass contactor
• power factor correction capacitor bank
The equipment shall provide an output relay to indicate that the unit is operating.

The equipment shall provide at least three additional relays with user-selectable
functionality, enabling indication of:
• Ready state
• Low current state
• High current state
• Motor temperature state
• Trip states (with adjustable delays);
• Motor overload
• Current imbalance
• Undercurrent
• Instantaneous overcurrent
• Mains frequency
• Ground fault
• Time-overcurrent
• SCR overtemperature
• Phase loss
• Motor thermistor
• Undervoltage

3.5 Programmable Control Inputs

The equipment shall provide at least two programmable inputs with the following
functionality:
• Parameter set selection
• Auxiliary Trip (N/O)
• Auxiliary Trip (N/C)
• Local/Remote Select
• Emergency Mode Operation
• Emergency Stop (N/C)
Each input must be able to be set for N/O or N/C operation and must have
selectable delays.

6
 LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

3.6 Metering and Performance Monitoring

The equipment shall include comprehensive metering and monitoring functions.

The equipment shall provide real-time feedback of operating conditions, including:

• average current
• L1, L2 & L3 currents
• average voltage
• L1, L2 & L3 voltages
• mains frequency
• motor real power consumption (kVA)
• motor active power consumption (kW)
• motor power factor
• elapsed running time
• time to run before programmed stop (when running)
The equipment shall provide feedback of historical operating information, including:
• lifetime hours run
• lifetime start count
• resettable hours run
• resettable start count
• resettable kWh count
The control interface shall allow the user to select which parameters to display on
the LCD.

The equipment shall record full details of its state at the time of every protection
activation. The recorded details shall include, at minimum:
• time and date stamp.
• protection type
• motor operating status
• mains frequency
• line current
• line voltage
The equipment's protection log shall store no fewer than eight trips.

The equipment shall record all changes to its configuration.

The equipment's change log shall store no fewer than 99 events.

3.7 Remote Communications

The starter must have the ability to download parameters and monitor via a
computer during commissioning.

Optional Remote communications be available for the following interfaces to both

monitor and control the soft starter.
• Modbus RTU
• Profibus
• Devicenet

7
SUPPORT AND SERVICES

Support and Services

4.

4.1 Commissioning
The equipment supplier shall be capable of providing commissioning of the
equipment.

4.2 Documentation
The equipment shall be provided with a complete set of user and support
documentation, including:
• User manual
• Recommended list of spare parts
• Schematic & GA drawings

4.3 Training
The equipment supplier shall be capable of providing a complete training schedule
with the equipment.

The equipment supplier shall undertake to deliver the complete training programme
if required by the customer.

The training programme shall be delivered at the customer's premises or at the

supplier's premises, as required by the customer.

The training programme shall deliver to the customer the skills to:
• appropriately programme the equipment to meet customer requirements
• safely commission the equipment
• safely operate the equipment
• identify and rectify operating problems caused by incorrect programming
• identify and diagnose operating problems caused by faulty equipment

4.4 Warranty and Repair

The supplier shall guarantee the equipment against faults of materials or
manufacture workmanship for a period of not less than 18 months from the date of
manufacture..

The supplier shall guarantee to provide servicing support for the equipment for a
period of not less than 10 years.

4.5 Standards and Approvals

The equipment must, as a minimum comply with and be certified to:
• UL /cUL UL508,UL347
• CE EMC EU Directive
• C -tick EMC Requirements
• Marine Lloyds

8
 SPECIFICATION:

MVX Solid State

Reduced Voltage Motor Starter

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
 CONTENTS

Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................2
1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Supplier Qualifications..................................................................................... 2
1.3 Starter Ratings ................................................................................................ 2

Environmental Specifications .........................................................................................................3

2.1 Environmental Specifications .......................................................................... 3
2.2 Physical Specifications .................................................................................... 3

Logic Control Configuration ...........................................................................................................5

3.1 Control Interface .............................................................................................. 5
3.2 Operating Configurations ................................................................................ 6
3.3 Motor and System Protection Features........................................................... 6
3.4 Programmable Relay Outputs ......................................................................... 7
3.5 Programmable Control Inputs ......................................................................... 7
3.6 Metering and Performance Monitoring ............................................................ 8
3.7 Remote Communications ................................................................................ 8

Support and Services ......................................................................................................................9

4.1 Commissioning ................................................................................................ 9
4.2 Documentation ................................................................................................ 9
4.3 Training............................................................................................................ 9
4.4 Warranty and Repair ....................................................................................... 9
4.5 Standards and Approvals ................................................................................ 9

1
INTRODUCTION

Introduction
1.

1.

1.1 Scope
This document specifies the minimum requirements for a solid state reduced
voltage motor starter for medium voltage application.

This specification is intended as a guideline for suppliers wishing to supply their

product to <customer name> for their <project name/outline of requirement>.

The solid state reduced voltage starter shall control three phases at ____ V,
___ Hz and shall be rated to suit the application and motor characteristics. Where
possible motor and load curves will be provided and the supplier will use this data
to justify selection. The starter shall provide soft starting and soft stopping of the
motor as required.

1.2 Supplier Qualifications

The equipment shall have been manufactured by a single vendor.

The manufacturer shall be certified under ISO9000.

The manufacturer shall have produced solid state reduced voltage starters for a
minimum of 20 years.

1.3 Starter Ratings

The ratings of the equipment shall be stated as per IEC 60947-4-2

The supplier must be able to provide documentation confirming that the equipment
is correctly rated and fit for purpose.

2
 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Environmental Specifications
2.

2.1 Environmental Specifications

The equipment shall be suitable for storage at temperatures from -25 ºC to +55 ºC.

The equipment shall be suitable for use at temperatures from -10 ºC to +60 ºC.

The equipment shall be suitable for use at temperatures up to 40 ºC without

derating.

The equipment shall be suitable for operation at altitudes up to 1000 m above sea
level without derating.

The equipment shall be suitable for use in environments with relative humidity
between 5% and 95% (non-condensing).

2.2 Physical Specifications

The equipment shall be modular in design and construction.

The thyristor assembly for each phase shall consist of a discrete module, and be
individually replaceable

Replacement of a thyristor assembly by a qualified service technician shall not take

longer than 10 minutes.

The integrated starter must be enclosed up to IP4X and include:

• Withdrawable Vacuum, fused Line contactor with ratings:

• Fixed Vacuum Bypass contactor

All contactors shall have the following ratings:

1. Class: indoor withdrawable
2. Rated Voltage: 12 kV
3. Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage: 75 kV (peak)
4. Rated 1-minute power frequency withstand voltage: 28 kV (rms)
5. Rated Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
6. Rated short circuit breaking current: 20 kA (with fuses)
7. Rated short circuit making current: 62.5 kA (with fuses)
8. Duty: continuous
9. Utilisation factor: AC3
10. Protection coordination: Type 2
11. Minimum Service Life: 100,000 operations at full operating current.

• A pad-lockable earthing switch

• All panels must provide separate chambers for all main sections including Bus
bars, Line Contactor, Soft starters and LV control. The entire panel, including
inter-chamber, must be arc fault certified to 31.5kA for 1 seconds.

• All panels shall have the following ratings:

1. IAC classified AFLR
2. Rated short term withstand current: 31.5 kA for 3 seconds
3. BIL: 75 kV

• The equipment shall employ fibre-optic cabling to ensure complete isolation

between low voltage and high voltage circuitry.

3
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

The equipment shall provide means to safely test its correct installation:
1. The equipment shall provide a means to test the installation using a low
voltage motor.
2. The equipment shall provide a means to test operation of all control circuitry
and protection mechanisms, without connection to medium voltage. Functions
to be tested include, at minimum:
• motor starting
• motor stopping
• protection activation

NOTE
For installations with motor FLC >160 A, the line and bypass contactors must be replaced by a
withdrawable and fixed circuit breaker respectively.

4
 LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

Logic Control Configuration

3.

3.1 Control Interface

The controller must have a minimum environmental rating of IP55.

The user interface shall comprise, at minimum:

• an LCD screen for information feedback in plain English
• be able to be multilingual
• status LEDs indicating
• motor state
• starter control state
• trip status
• output relay activity
• local pushbuttons to control:
• motor start
• motor stop
• starter reset
• menu access
• parameter configuration

Remote control of the starter shall be possible using either two or three wire
control.

Have multi level password protection system, to prevent unauthorized parameter

access; but still allowing access for operators to metering functions and logs.

All terminals shall be of the pluggable type.

The control interface shall provide a means for an operator to quickly access and
configure parameters.

The control interface shall provide an operator with a short list of critical
parameters for common applications, including:
• pump
• fan
• compressor
• generic
The equipment shall permit the operator to save the current configuration to an
internal file. There shall be two files available.

The equipment shall permit the operator to reload a previously saved configuration
set from an internal file. There shall be two files available.

The equipment shall permit the operator to restore default settings.

The equipment shall support remote management via a control network with a
choice of Modbus, Profibus and DeviceNet as a minimum.

The equipment shall provide an on-board real-time clock; but failure of this clock
due to low battery shall not trip the starter.

5
LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

3.2 Operating Configurations

The equipment shall permit the user to select between multiple profiles for starting
the motor.

The equipment shall provide a kick-start option for starting the motor.

The equipment shall permit the user to select between multiple profiles for stopping
the motor.

The equipment shall provide a feedback ramp option for stopping the motor.

The equipment shall provide a means of automatically stopping the motor at a

predetermined time or after a predetermined period of operation.

The equipment shall be suitable for use with dual-speed and slip-ring motors

Thermal modeling that allows the soft starter to dynamically calculate the motor
temperature, predict the motors available thermal capacity, to predict whether the
motor can successfully complete a start.

3.3 Motor and System Protection Features

The starter shall have the following adjustable protection functions included as
standard. (ANSI Codes):

The equipment's sensitivity and response for protection functions shall be

programmable.
 Overload (49/51)
 Undercurrent (37)
 Instantaneous Over-current (50)
 Current Imbalance (46)
 Frequency (81)
 Auxiliary Trip A (86/97)
 Auxiliary Trip B (86/97)
 Excess start time (66)
 Maximum start Time (48)
 Starter Communications Failure (3)
 Battery/Clock Failure (3)
 SCR Temperature
 Ground Fault (50G)
 Overvoltage (59)
 Under-voltage (27)
 Phase sequence (47)
 Phase Loss (47)
 Power Loss (32)

The following protection states are also provided:

• Motor not detected
• Auxiliary trip A
• Auxiliary trip B
• Network communications
• EEPROM failure
• Gate drive failure
• Conduction 1 invalid
• Conduction 2 invalid
• Conduction 3 invalid

6
 LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

• Assembly control voltage low

The equipment's possible responses to protection activation shall include, at
minimum:
• trip: cease operation and disable the motor
• warn: notify the condition to the operator and continue operating
• ride through: write the event to memory

3.4 Programmable Relay Outputs

The equipment shall provide output relays to control operation of:
• main contactor
• bypass contactor
• power factor correction capacitor bank
The equipment shall provide an output relay to indicate that the unit is operating.

The equipment shall provide at least three additional relays with user-selectable
functionality, enabling indication of:
• Ready state
• Low current state
• High current state
• Motor temperature state
• Trip states (with adjustable delays);
• Motor overload
• Current imbalance
• Undercurrent
• Instantaneous Overcurrent
• Mains frequency
• Ground fault
• Time-overcurrent
• SCR over temperature
• Phase loss
• Motor thermistor
• Undervoltage

3.5 Programmable Control Inputs

The equipment shall provide at least two programmable inputs with the following
functionality:
• Parameter set selection
• Auxiliary Trip (N/O)
• Auxiliary Trip (N/C)
• Local/Remote Select
• Emergency Mode Operation
• Emergency Stop (N/C)
Each input must be able to be set for N/O or N/C operation and must have
selectable delays.

7
LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION

3.6 Metering and Performance Monitoring

The equipment shall include comprehensive metering and monitoring functions.

The equipment shall provide real-time feedback of operating conditions, including:

• average current
• L1, L2 & L3 currents
• average voltage
• L1, L2 & L3 voltages
• mains frequency
• motor real power consumption (kVA)
• motor active power consumption (kW)
• motor power factor
• elapsed running time
• time to run before programmed stop (when running)
The equipment shall provide feedback of historical operating information, including:
• lifetime hours run
• lifetime start count
• resettable hours run
• resettable start count
• resettable kWh count
The control interface shall allow the user to select which parameters to display on
the LCD.

The equipment shall record full details of its state at the time of every protection
activation. The recorded details shall include, at minimum:
• time and date stamp.
• protection type
• motor operating status
• mains frequency
• line current
• line voltage
The equipment's protection log shall store no fewer than eight trips.

The equipment shall record all changes to its configuration.

The equipment's change log shall store no fewer than 99 events.

3.7 Remote Communications

The starter must have the ability to download parameters and monitor via a
computer during commissioning.

Optional Remote communications be available for the following interfaces to both

monitor and control the soft starter.
• Modbus RTU
• Profibus
• DeviceNet

8
 SUPPORT AND SERVICES

Support and Services

4.

4.1 Commissioning
The equipment supplier shall be capable of providing commissioning of the
equipment.

4.2 Documentation
The equipment shall be provided with a complete set of user and support
documentation, including:
• User manual
• Recommended list of spare parts
• Schematic & GA drawings

4.3 Training
The equipment supplier shall be capable of providing a complete training schedule
with the equipment.

The equipment supplier shall undertake to deliver the complete training programme
if required by the customer.

The training programme shall be delivered at the customer's premises or at the

supplier's premises, as required by the customer.

The training programme shall deliver to the customer the skills to:
• appropriately programme the equipment to meet customer requirements
• safely commission the equipment
• safely operate the equipment
• identify and rectify operating problems caused by incorrect programming
• identify and diagnose operating problems caused by faulty equipment

4.4 Warranty and Repair

The supplier shall guarantee the equipment against faults of materials or
manufacture workmanship for a period of not less than 18 months from the date of
manufacture.

The supplier shall guarantee to provide servicing support for the equipment for a
period of not less than 10 years.

4.5 Standards and Approvals

The equipment must, as a minimum, comply with and be certified to:
• IEC 62271-200
• IEC 60947-4-2
• IEC 60664
• IEC 60529
• NZS4219
• IEEE 242
• CE EMC EU Directive
• C -tick EMC Requirements
• Marine Lloyds

9
 SPECIFICATION:

Power factor Correction

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
 CONTENTS

Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................2
1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Supplier Qualifications..................................................................................... 2

Environmental Specifications .........................................................................................................3

2.1 Environmental Specifications .......................................................................... 3
2.2 Physical Specifications .................................................................................... 3

Support and Services ......................................................................................................................4

3.1 Documentation ................................................................................................ 4
3.2 Training............................................................................................................ 4
3.3 Warranty and Repair ....................................................................................... 4
3.4 Standards and Approvals ................................................................................ 4

1
INTRODUCTION

Introduction
1

1.1 Scope
This document specifies the minimum requirements for power factor correction
when used in conjunction with electronic soft starters.

This specification is intended as a guideline for suppliers wishing to supply their

product to <customer name> for their <project name/outline of requirement>.

1.2 Supplier Qualifications

The equipment shall have been manufactured by a single vendor.

The manufacturer shall be certified under ISO9000.

The manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate previous successful application of

power factor correction with soft starters

2
 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Environmental Specifications
2

2.1 Environmental Specifications

The equipment shall be suitable for storage at temperatures from -25 ºC to +55 ºC.

The equipment shall be suitable for use at temperatures from -10 ºC to +60 ºC.

The equipment shall be suitable for use at temperatures up to 40 ºC without

derating.

The equipment shall be suitable for operation at altitudes up to 1000 m above sea
level without derating.

The equipment shall be suitable for use in environments with relative humidity
between 5% and 95% (non-condensing).

2.2 Physical Specifications

The equipment shall be modular in design and construction.

The power factor correction components must be installed in a dedicated panel

and not the soft starter panel.

The integrated power factor panel must be enclosed up to IP4X and include:

• Withdrawable Vacuum, fused contactor with ratings:

1. Class: indoor withdrawable
2. Rated Voltage: 12 kV
3. Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage: 75 kV (peak)
4. Rated 1-minute power frequency withstand voltage: 28 kV (rms)
5. Rated Frequency: 50 Hz
6. Rated short circuit breaking current: 20 kA (with fuses)
7. Rated short circuit making current: 62.5 kA (with fuses)
8. Duty: continuous
9. Utilisation factor: AC6
10. Protection coordination: Type 2
11. Minimum Service Life: 100,000 operations at full operating current.
• Inrush reactors designed to reduce the inrush current to that required by
IEC60871-1. The supplier must provide calculations for the correct selection of
the reactors.
• Capacitors shall be selected to improve the power factor to the level required
by the local utility.
• The capacitor shall have a voltage rating 20% above the nominal operating
voltage so as to be able to withstand high voltages associated with capacitor
switching.
• The capacitor circuit must be supplied from the line side of the soft starter.

• All panels must provide separate chambers for all main sections including
Busbars, Contactor, Capacitors. The entire panel, including inter-chamber,
must be arc fault certified to 31.5kA for 3 seconds.

• All panels shall have the following ratings:

1. IAC classified AFLR
2. Rated short term withstand current: 31.5kA for 3 seconds
3. BIL: 75kV

3
SUPPORT AND SERVICES

Support and Services

3

3.1 Documentation
The equipment shall be provided with a complete set of user and support
documentation, including:
• User manual
• Recommended list of spare parts
• Schematic & GA drawings

3.2 Training
The equipment supplier shall be capable of providing a complete training schedule
with the equipment.

The equipment supplier shall undertake to deliver the complete training programme
if required by the customer.

The training programme shall be delivered at the customer's premises or at the

supplier's premises, as required by the customer.

The training programme shall deliver to the customer the skills to:
• appropriately programme the equipment to meet customer requirements
• safely commission the equipment
• safely operate the equipment
• identify and rectify operating problems caused by incorrect programming
• identify and diagnose operating problems caused by faulty equipment

3.3 Warranty and Repair

The supplier shall guarantee the equipment against faults of materials or
manufacture workmanship for a period of not less than 18 months from the date of
manufacture.

The supplier shall guarantee to provide servicing support for the equipment for a
period of not less than 10 years.

3.4 Standards and Approvals

The equipment must, as a minimum comply with and be certified to:

IEC 62271-200
IEC 60947-4-2
IEC 60664
IEC 60529
NZS4219
IEEE 242
IEC60871
CE EMC EU Directive
C -tick EMC Requirements
Marine Lloyds

4
SPECIFICATION:

Switchgear

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
 CONTENTS

Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................2
1.1 General ............................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Submission ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Quality Assurance ........................................................................................... 2

Documentation .................................................................................................................................3
2.1 Drawings ......................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Project Manuals............................................................................................... 3
2.3 Factory Testing & Commissioning Test Sheets .............................................. 3

Electrical Supply ..............................................................................................................................4

3.1 General ............................................................................................................ 4
3.2 Standards ........................................................................................................ 4
3.3 Service Conditions .......................................................................................... 5
3.4 Material Quality ............................................................................................... 5
3.5 Busbar System ................................................................................................ 6
3.6 Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................... 6
3.7 Shutters ........................................................................................................... 7
3.8 Earthing & Earth Switch .................................................................................. 7
3.9 Cable Termination ........................................................................................... 7
3.10 Protection Relays ............................................................................................ 7
3.11 Current & Voltage Transformers ..................................................................... 7
3.12 Labels .............................................................................................................. 8
3.13 Control Wiring .................................................................................................. 8

1
INTRODUCTION

Introduction
1.

1.1 General
This Section defines the general requirements for MV switchgear and associated electrical works.
This specification, used in conjunction with purchase documents, data sheets, and / or drawings
establishes the minimum requirements for the design, fabrication and testing of the switchgear
aspects of the work for the Plant.
• Reference to other industrial standards for compliance shall be interpreted as an integral part of
this specification.
• The Contractor / Supplier shall be responsible for obtaining from the Client all necessary
approvals and information required to complete the Works.
• All electrical work shall be carried out in accordance with local regulations or other recognized
international standards.
• The approval of equipment and material by the relevant authority shall not prejudice the rights of
the Client to reject such equipment or material that does not comply with the specification.
• If required the Contractor / Supplier shall engage professionally qualified specialists/experts to
carry out any special activities associated with the provision of special electrical equipment and
to comply with all local relevant regulations.

1.2 Submission
The Contractor / Supplier shall submit designs, drawings, data, documents and other such
information as specified and required for the Client's review.
All submittals shall be in English.
The Client will either:
1. Review the submittal; or
2. Review the submittal subject to notations; or
Where the submittal is reviewed, it will be so endorsed by the Client and one copy returned to the
Contractor / Supplier.
The Contractor / Supplier shall make the required alterations and transmit the required copies of the
altered submittal.
All work under the Contract shall comply in all respects with the submittals reviewed by the Client
described above.
Review by the Client of any drawing, method of work, or any information regarding materials and
equipment the Contractor proposes to furnish, shall not relieve the Contractor / Supplier of
responsibility for any errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability.
Such acceptance shall be considered to mean only that the Client has no objection to the Contractor
/ Supplier using, upon the Contractor's own full responsibility, the plan or method of work proposed,
or furnishing the materials and equipment proposed.
1.3 Quality Assurance
The Contractor / Supplier shall be ISO 9000 certified. The Contract / Supplier must provide
certification compliance and demonstrate this to the Client.

2
 DOCUMENTATION

Documentation
2.

2.1 Drawings
Unless approved by the Client, all drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD or an approved
computer aided drafting (CAD) package. All drawings shall be A3 size
CAD files of all the Contract Drawings will be provided to the Contractor / Supplier upon receipt of
the Contractor's / Suppliers written request.
Electrical wiring and circuit diagrams shall be neat, clear, un-crowded and shall show all equipment
using standard symbols. All electrical equipment wiring and terminals shall be numbered in
accordance with the Specification requirements.

2.2 Project Manuals

The Contractor / Supplier shall supply manuals for the operation and maintenance of all electrical
and instrumentation and control systems supplied under the Contract. In addition, the Contractor
shall provide comprehensive manuals, which detail the programming and configuration of any
programmable systems.
The Contractor / Supplier shall also provide an electronic copy of the manual.
In general, sufficient information shall be provided to enable the plant's operations and maintenance
personnel to understand the function of all equipment and its components and to correctly perform
the required operation and maintenance.
2.3 Factory Testing & Commissioning Test Sheets
Contractor / Supplier shall prepare detailed check sheets to record each phase and item of testing
and commissioning as required by the Client.
The check sheets shall include separate items for each test and check of each input/output; and
each step and sequence of functional operation. Each item on the check sheets shall have provision
for recording the date of the activity and name and signature of the Contractor's personnel who
carried out the activity.

3
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

Electrical Supply
3.

3.1 General
The main power supply to the plant shall be from the power supply authority at XXkV
All equipment provided under this Contract shall be suitable for continuous operation at the voltage
and conditions noted below. Compliance is required to clause 9.101 of IEC 62271-200; “Information
with enquiries and orders”
All equipment and work associated with the Contract shall be entirely suitable for operation on the
plant power supply systems as specified; and tabled below
Nominal voltage between phases xxkV
Number of Phases 3
System fundamental frequency TBA Hz
System Neutral TBA
Design Fault Level xx kA for xx sec
Loss of Service Continuity Category TBA
Internal Arc Classification TBA

3.2 Standards
The work, equipment and other items shall comply with the requirements of relevant IEC and other
nominated standards, codes and regulations; including those referenced throughout the
Specification and any other Authorities having jurisdiction over any portion of the work, and on the
method of performing such work.
Where there is any discrepancy between the referenced standards and this Specification (and
associated Contract Drawings), the requirements of this Specification (and associated Contract
Drawings) shall have precedence.

3.2.1 Switchgear
Designed to:
a) Switchgear and apparatus IEC62271-1
IEC62271-200
IEC62271-304
GB3906 (2006)
DL-T-404
DL-T-593
b) Internal arc resistance IEC62271-200
Annex A.6, criteria 1 to 5
c) Levels of insulation (coordination guide) IEC60071
d) Degrees of protection IEC60529
e) Seismic The Uniform Building code,
Section 1629.6.8
IEC60721-2-6, Table 1 for static
load test
f) Drilled holes and screw connections for busbars DIN43673-1
g) Classification of groups of environmental parameters IEC60721-3-1
and their severities – Storage
h) Classification of groups of environmental parameters IEC60721-3-2
and their severities – Transportation IEC60068-2-32
i) Classification of groups of environmental parameters IEC60721-3-3
and their severities –
Stationary use at weather protected locations

4
 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

3.2.2 MV Equipment
a) Circuit breakers IEC62271-100
b) Alternating current disconnectors and earthing IEC62271-102
switches
c) Contactors IEC60470
d) Fuses IEC60282-1
e) PFC capacitors IEC60871-1
f) Current transformers IEC60044-1
g) Voltage transformers IEC60044-2
h) Current sensors IEC60044-8
i) Voltage sensors IEC60044-7

3.2.3 LV Equipment
a) LV Switchgear and Controlgear Part 1 General Rules IEC60947-1
b) LV Switchgear and Controlgear Part 2 Circuit breakers IEC60947-2
c) LV Switchgear and Controlgear Part 5-1 Control circuit IEC60947-5-1
devices etc
d) LV Switchgear and Controlgear Part 7-1 Auxiliary IEC60947-7-1
equipment, terminal blocks

3.3 Service Conditions

All equipment provided under this Contract shall be suitable for operation and standby duties, for the
nominated operating conditions, under the following service and climatic conditions:
Climate TBA
Ambient air temperature minimum -5°C, maximum +60°C (derate above 40°C)
Altitude 1000 m above mean sea level
Relative humidity minimum 35%, maximum 95%
Atmosphere TBA
Seismic Zone TBA
Ventilation and thermostatically controlled heaters shall be provided, where necessary, to prevent
condensation of moisture on idle or stored materials and equipment.
Ventilation shall be provided to dissipate heat from heat producing electrical equipment and keep
them and other materials and equipment in the affected area within the safe temperature limits
recommended by the respective manufacturers.

3.3.1 Corrosion Protection

All equipment provided shall be painted or protected against nominated corrosive environments. The
Contractor /Supplier to specify the coating system provided.
Anti-corrosive paint to a minimum thickness of 50 micron shall be applied to the cleaned metal
surface. The finish shall be resistant to the harmful effects of the specified environment.

3.3.2 Enclosure Protection

Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all electrical, control system and
instrumentation equipment and enclosures shall have the following minimum protection ratings:
• IP4X for equipment, cubicles, panels and switchgear enclosures mounted in indoor air
conditioned switch rooms or other non-process conditioned rooms.
3.4 Material Quality
Materials selected shall be new, free from manufacturing defects, and suitable for undiminished
performance for the design life of the plant.
Materials shall be “fire resistant”, non-flame-propagating and waterproof.

5
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

Glass fiber and plastic material shall withstand the operating temperatures and exposure to sunlight.
Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent chemical deterioration of the contact surfaces.
MV SWITCHBOARD
1. The “metal enclosed” MV Switchboard under this contract shall comprise the panels as shown
on the drawings and / or schedules.
2. The switchboard shall comply with the latest issue of IEC 62271-1 and IEC 62271-200 and with
the nominated IP rating against the external environment
3. The switchboard shall be of the modular “metal enclosed” floor mounted, extensible type
equipped with circuit breakers, busbars. instruments. relays and all accessories as is described
in the specifications hereinafter and the Drawings.
4. All cubicles shall be of standard pattern and dimensions, robust in construction; dust and vermin
proof. and suitable for indoor use. The design of the cubicles and associated equipment shall be
such as to enable extensions to be made at either end.
5. The switchboard cubicles shall have separate compartments for the switchgear, busbars, cable
termination, relays and controls. The compartment shall restrict access to that area described
above only.
6. Pressure relief flaps shall be provided on the top of each HV cubicle to relief excess pressure
deeming an internal fault.
7. All circuit breakers or contactors shall be of the withdrawable isolating type. with the trucks
identical and interchangeable in every switchgear cubicle. A positive guide shall be provided for
the truck entry into the cubicle and clear indications given when the truck is at the engaged
position.

3.5 Busbar System

1. Busbars and electrical connections between pieces of apparatus shall be of electrolytic copper
and shall be sufficiently insulated from earth and from each other to withstand the specified high
voltage tests.
2. Busbars shall be air-insulated. All busbars shall be suitable for normal operations at rated
voltage, conditions and working environment without secondary insulation. The busbars,
connections and their insulated supports shall be of approved construction, mechanically strong,
and shall withstand all the stresses which may be imposed upon them due to fixing, vibration,
fluctuations in temperature, short circuits or other causes.
3. The busbars shall be so arranged that they may be extended in length without difficulty.
Connections shall be kept as short and straight as possible, and any joints shall not increase the
resistance of the connection. When dissimilar metals are connected, approved means shall be
provided to prevent electro-chemical corrosion.
4. The busbars and connections shall be so arranged and supported that under no circumstances,
including short circuit conditions, can the clearances from earthed metalwork or other conductors
be less than the distances required in the standards.

3.6 Circuit Breakers

1. CB’s shall be Vacuum type for new MV Switchboards. CB’s must comply with IEC 62271-100.
2. The CB breaking capacity shall be equal to, or greater than the busbar Isc.
3. The circuit breaker shall be of the trip free, vertical or horizontal isolation, horizontal drawout
carriage mounted type. The number of electrical and mechanical operations must be stated.
4. The various parts of the circuit breaker shall be of substantial construction, carefully fitted to
reduce mechanical shock during operation to a minimum and to prevent inadvertent operation
due to vibration or other causes.
5. The circuit breaker shall be arranged for trip free, independent manual operation.
6. The CB method of operation to be provided as part of the submission.
7. The circuit breakers shall have been subjected to impulse voltage tests for the rated voltage.
8. The circuit breaker shall be provided with automatic locking devices to lock the movable portion
of the unit in either the 'engaged' or fully 'isolated' position, The interlocking mechanisms shall be
provided to satisfy the following requirements:

6
 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

9. Circuit breaker truck shall only be movable from engaged position to isolated position and vice
versa only when the circuit breaker is open.
10. Circuit breaker truck shall be locked in cubicle panel while the circuit breaker remains closed,
11. Circuit breaker cannot be closed unless the circuit breaker truck is in the fully engaged position.

3.7 Shutters
1. During the isolation of the circuit breaker, the busbars and cable orifices shall be automatically
covered by self-closing shutters. The shutters for the busbar and cable orifices shall be
independent of each other so that one can be opened manually without interfering with the other.
2. Provision shall also be provided for padlocking the shutters. All busbars or cable orifices shall
have prominent markings or labelling to clearly identify them. The safety shutters shall be
metallic type and shall be earthed.

3.8 Earthing & Earth Switch

1. All metal parts shall be earthed in an approved manner to the earthing system. The necessary
terminals on each part of the equipment shall be provided.
2. An integral earthing device shall be provided to connect each outgoing cables of each outgoing
circuit breaker to earth when required without the use of loose attachments. It shall be possible
to switch the device only when the circuit breaker is in the open and isolated position by means
of a mechanical interlocking system.
3. The earthing device shall have sufficient capacity to withstand full fault level at the point of
installation.
4. Provisions shall be provided for prominent indication when any of the earthing devices has been
activated.
5. The cross sectional area and construction of the earthing busbar shall be capable of
withstanding the full rated short circuit current of the switchgear for 3 seconds.

3.9 Cable Termination

1. Power cable terminating compartment shall be suitable for reception of the specified cable type,
number of cables and direction of entry.
2. Upon completion the cable termination compartment shall be sealed by approved method to
prevent ingress of rodents and insects.
3. Entry into the control cable ducts for multi-core PVC/SWA/PVC cables, shall be provided and
shall be in a readily accessible position in each switchgear panel.

3.10 Protection Relays

1. Electronic protection relays providing functions as stated in the Drawings are preferred.
2. All relays shall confirm to the relevant IEC standards or approved equivalent.
3. All relays shall be contained in dust proof cases. All cases shall be earthed, unless otherwise
stated. The relays shall be mounted on the switchgear panel in a balanced and approved
arrangement. They shall be of flush mounted type and shall be arranged so that replacements
can be effected quickly and with minimum amount of labour. All relays except where otherwise
stated shall be capable of breaking or making the max. current which can occur in the circuit
which they have to control, and they shall not be affected by vibration or by external magnetic
fields.
4. Permanent facilities shall be provided for testing protective equipment in-situ without having to
remove any connecting wires.

3.11 Current & Voltage Transformers

1. The switchgear panels shall be provided with current and voltage transformers to the
specifications provided or shown on the drawings; having ratios and quantity as shown in the
drawings.
2. Only voltage transformers with proven reliability shall be used. In general voltage transformers
shall be of epoxy-resin encapsulated type to the requirements of IEC 60044-2
3. The primary windings shall be connected to the switchgear through readily accessible renewable
high rupturing capacity fuses of approved type. Secondary fuses or MCB’s shall be provided for
each transformer; and the secondary windings shall be earthed at one point.

7
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

4. All current transformers (C.Ts) shall be of the epoxy- resin encapsulated type and shall conform
to the requirements of IEC 60044-1, for the type of duty required.
5. The CT’s shall be installed on the side of the circuit breaker remote from the busbars. The
primary winding shall be of the bar type and of approved cross-section compatible with the circuit
breaker rating.
6. The secondary windings of each set of C.Ts shall be earthed at one point.
7. C.Ts. for protective purposes shall be of the nominated protection Class, rated burden and
saturation factor sufficient to cater for the normal relay settings and load burdens required in the
protection scheme.
8. Current transformers used for metering and indicating instruments shall have accuracy not less
than the nominated; typically Class 0.5 and Class 1.0 respectively. Each transformer shall be
capable of providing the necessary VA to operate the related instruments.

3.12 Labels
1. Each item of equipment shall carry the manufacturer's rating plates, with information and
compliance with the relevant standard.
2. Further labelling shall be provided to indicate the main functions of each service and control
equipment item.
3. All wiring terminal positions and terminations shall be identified by local labels to indicate the
group services, e.g. closing, tripping, etc. This shall be in addition to the cable ferrule method.

3.13 Control Wiring

1. Suitably rated terminal blocks shall be provided for all external cable connections.
2. Terminals for circuits carrying different voltages shall be segregated, labelled and separated with
insulating barriers.
3. Control cabling inside electrical panels shall be with PVC V105 insulated stranded single-core
copper cable. The minimum cross section shall be suitable for the load current and volt-drop for
CT secondary wiring or small power circuits.
4. For other control circuits, the minimum size shall be 1.0 mm sq. Wiring shall be neatly run and
shall be securely fixed in insulated ducting or harnesses with easy access for checking.
5. A suitable control wiring colour schedule shall be provided to differentiate voltages and functions.

8
RESOURCES

6.2 Metric/Imperial Conversion Factors

Length
1 mile = 1.609 km 1 km = 0.621 mile
1 yd = 0.914 m 1m = 1.09 yd
1 ft = 0.305 m 1m = 3.28 ft
1 in = 25.4 mm 1 mm = 0.039 in
Mass
1 oz = 28.3 g 1g = 0.0352 oz
1 lb = 0.454 kg 1 kg = 2.20 lb
Area
1 in2 = 6.45 cm2 1 cm2 = 0.155 in2
2 2
1ft = 0.093 m 1 m2 = 10.8 ft2
Volume
1 in3 = 16.4 cm3 1 cm3 = 0.061 in3
3 3
1 ft = 0.028 m 1 m3 = 35.3 ft3
1 pint = 0.568 l 1l = 1.76 pint
1 gallon (imperial) = 4.55 l 1l = 0.220 gallon
1 gallon (US) = 3.79 l 1l = 0.264 gallon
Velocity
1 mile/h = 1.61 km/h 1 km/h = 0.622 mile/h
1 knot = 1.85 km/h 1 km/h = 0.540 knot
Power
1 hp = 0.746 kW 1 kW = 1.34 hp
1 kcal/h = 1.16 W 1W = 0.860 kcal/h
Energy
1 cal = 4.187 J 1J = 0.239 cal
1 kWh = 3.6 MJ 1 MJ = 0.278 kWh
Force
1 lbf = 4.45 N 1N = 0.225 lbf
1 kgf = 9.807 N 1N = 0.102 kgf
Moment of Inertia
1 ft·lb2 = 0.413 Nm2 1 Nm2 = 2.42 ft·lb2
2 2
1 ft·lb = 4.054 kgm 1 kgm2 = 0.247 ft·lb2
Temperature
freezing point = 32 °F = 0 °C
boiling point = 212 °F = 100 °C
typical ambient = 104 °F = 40 °C
 to convert a temperature from Fahrenheit to degrees Celsius: C = (t°F - 32) x 0.556
 to convert a temperature from degrees Celsius to Fahrenheit: F = t°C x 1.8 +32

For additional information on the International System of Units, see http://www.bipm.org.

Page 216 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 RESOURCES

6.3 Wire Diameter Conversion

The American wire gauge (AWG) system is commonly used in the US and Canada to specify the diameter of
electrical wires.
AWG number Area (mm2) Nearest standard metric equivalent
(mm2)
4/0 107 120
3/0 85 95
2/0 67.4 70
1/0 53.5 70
1 42.4 50
2 33.6 35
3 26.7 35
4 21.2 25
5 16.8 25
6 13.3 16
7 10.5 16
8 8.37 10
9 6.63 10
10 5.26 6
11 4.17 6
12 3.31 4
13 2.62 4
14 2.08 2.5
15 1.65 2.5
16 1.31 1.5
17 1.04 1.5
18 0.823 1
19 0.653 0.75
20 0.518 0.75
21 0.41 0.5
Source: derived from ASTM (2002) and IEC 60228.

NOTE
This table does not provide a one-to-one correspondence between AWG and metric cables. This table
states the smallest standard metric cable which will provde at least as much carrying capacity as the AWG
cable. To substitute an AWG cable for a specified metric cable, use an AWG cable with the same or
greater cross-section.

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 217

RESOURCES

6.4 Incoterms
International Commercial terms (Incoterms) are published by the International Chamber of Commerce, and define
the responsibilities, costs and risks associated with the transportation and delivery of goods.
Key Incoterms for AuCom supplied equipment are:
EXW  Buyer arranges carriage from named place of delivery.
Ex Works  Buyer assumes risk when goods are made available.
(named place of delivery)  Buyer assumes costs when goods are made available.
CIP  Seller arranges and pays for transportation and insurance to named port of
Carriage and Insurance Paid to destination.
(named place of destination)  Buyer assumes risk when goods are received at the carrier.
 Buyer assumes costs when goods reach the named destination.
CIF  Seller arranges and pays for transportation and insurance to named
Cost, Insurance and Freight destination.
(named port of destination)  Buyer assumes risk when goods are loaded on board the ship at the point
of departure.
 Buyer assumes costs when goods reach the named port of destination.
DDP  Seller arranges carriage to the named place of destination, ready for
Delivered Duty Paid unloading.
(named place of destination)  Buyer assumes risks when goods are available for unloading at the named
place of destination.
 Buyer assumes costs when goods are available for unloading at the named
place of destination.

Page 218 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 RESOURCES

6.5 Commonly Used Abbreviations

ACU Automatic changeover unit
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ATL Across the line
ATS Automatic transfer switch
BCP Bus coupler panel
BRP Bus riser panel
BIL Basic lightning-impulse level (kV_peak)
DCO Double command operated
DOL Direct on line
FLA Full load amps (A)
FLC Full load current (A)
FLT Full load torque (Nm)
f Nominal frequency (Hz)
fr Rated frequency (Hz)
HP Horse power
HRC High rupturing capacity
IAC Internal Arc Classification (classification for metal enclosed switchgear arc withstand)
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I Nominal current (A)
Iasym (Ia) Asymmetrical fault current (kA_rms)
Isym (Is) Symmetrical fault current (kA_rms)
Ibb Rated back-to-back capacitor breaking current (A)
Ibi Rated back-to-back capacitor inrush making current (kA)
Ic Rated cable charging breaking current (A)
Id Rated out-of-phase breaking current (kA)
Isb Rated single capacitor bank breaking current (A)
Ik Short-time withstand current (kA)
Ir Rated current (A)
Ip (Idyn) Peak let-through fault current of an installation (kA_peak)
Isc Short circuit rms current of an installation (kA)
ISTP Stopping current
ISTR Starting current
IFP Incomer feeder panel
I0 Zero sequence current
I1 Positive sequence current
I2 Negative sequence current
kVA Apparent power unit
kVAr Reactive power unit

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 219

RESOURCES

kW Active power unit

LRC Locked rotor current (A)
LRT Locked rotor torque (Nm)
LSC Loss of service continuity (metal enclosed switchgear classification)
MTP Metering panel
MV Medium voltage
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
OSI Open systems interconnection
P Active power (W)
pf Power factor
PFC Power factor correction
PFP Power factor panel
rms Root mean squared
Q Reactive power (VAr)
SF6 Sulphur hexafluoride
S Apparent power (VA)
Ssc Short circuit power (VA)
SCO Single command operated
SST Soft starter
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol – Internet protocol
TRV Transient recovery voltage
TA Ambient temperature
tk Rated short-time withstand duration (s)
tSTP Stopping time (s)
tSTR Starting time (s)
U Nominal voltage (kV)
Ud Power-frequency withstand voltage (kV_rms for 1 minute)
Ur Rated voltage (kV)
Up Lightning-impulse withstand voltage (kV_peak for 1.2/50us)
VFD Variable frequency drive

Page 220 Medium Voltage Application Guide 710-12280-00A

 REFERENCES

7 References
ABB (2000), MWD Surge Arrestors (CHHOS/AR 3209.00E).
ABB (2006), ABB Switchgear Manual, 11th Edition.
http://www02.abb.com/global/seitp/seitp161.nsf/0/bf1431b2c459e7a3c1256f5d004a29bb/$file/index_abb_en.html
ABB (2007), Fuses (Catalogue 3405PL004-W1-en).
ASTM (2002), Standard specification for standard nominal diameters and cross-sectional areas of AWG sizes of solid
round wires used as electrical conductors.
BIPM (International Bureau of Weights and Measures), http://bipm.org.
Copper Development Association (2001), Copper for Busbars.
http://www.copperinfo.co.uk/busbars/pub22-copper-for-busbars/homepage.shtml
http://www.copperinfo.co.uk/busbars/pub22-copper-for-busbars/homepage.shtml
IEC (2003), IEC 60044-1. Instrument transformers - Part 1: Current transformers.
IEC (2003), P-IEC 60044-2. Instrument transformers - Part 2: Inductive voltage transformers.
IEC (2004), IEC-60228. Conductors of insulated cables.
IEC (2009), IEC 60255-1. Measuring relays and protection equipment - Part 1: Common requirements.
IEC (1988), P-IEC 60255-6. Electrical relays - Part 6: Measuring relays and protection equipment.
IEC (2005), IEC 60871-1. Shunt capacitors for AC power systems having a rated voltage above 1000 V - Part 1:
General.
IEC (2007), IEC 61869-1. Instrument transformers - Part 1: General requirements.
IEC (2011), IEC 61869-3. Instrument transformers - Part 3: Additional requirements for inductive voltage
transformers.
IEC (2007), IEC 62271-1. High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: Common specifications.
IEC (2008), IEC 62271-100. High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 100: Alternating current circuit breakers.
IEC (2011), IEC 62271-102. High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 102: Alternating current disconnectors
and earthing switches.
IEC (2011), IEC 62271-106. High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 106: Alternating current contactors,
contactor-based controllers and motor-starters.
IEC (2011), IEC 62271-200. High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 200: AC metal-enclosed switchgear and
controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV.
IEC (2006), IEC 62271-202. High voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 202: High-voltage/low-voltage
prefabricated substation.
IEEE (2008), C57.13-2008. IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
Melsom, S.W. and Booth, H.C. (1922), The Efficiency of Overlapping Joints. JIEE 60, 889-899.
Schneider Electric (2000), Medium Voltage Technical Guide (AMTED300014EN).

710-12280-00A Medium Voltage Application Guide Page 221